B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.
3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
4. Insulation: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames that are not to be grouted.
5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
6. Installation Tolerances: Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. 319
22-12479 – Ph 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9 of 9 C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 as follows:
a. Between Door and Frame at Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch minimum, 1/4 inch maximum. c. At Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.
e. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch minimum, 1/8 inch maximum.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND REPAIR
A. Final Adjustments: Final adjustment as specified in Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.”
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
320
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1 of 5 SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 and 23 Sections as applicable for access to Plumbing and Mechanical valves and equipment behind finished surfaces.
2. Division 26 Sections as applicable for access to Electrical equipment behind finished surfaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work with mechanical and plumbing trades. 321
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2 of 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Babcock-Davis.
2. Dur-Red Products.
3. J. L. Industries, Inc.
4. Karp Associates, Inc.
5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
6. Milcor Inc.
7. Nystrom, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Non-Fire Resistance Rated Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim:
Access doors with face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge.
1. Material:
a. Uncoated or Metallic Coated Steel Sheet:
1) Locations: Non-fire resistance rated wall and ceiling surfaces of painted gypsum board.
2) Doors: Nominal 0.060 inch (uncoated) or 0.064 inch (coated) (16 gage) thickness.
3) Frames: Nominal 0.060 inch (uncoated) or 0.064 inch (coated) (16 gage) thickness.
4) Finish: Factory prime finish, manufacturer’s standard baked on rust inhibitive gray primer.
b. Stainless Steel Sheet:
1) Locations: Non-fire resistance rated wall and ceiling surfaces with ceramic tile finish or prefinished wall paneling.
2) Doors: Nominal 0.062 inch (16 gage) thickness.
3) Frames: Same material and thickness as doors.
4) Finish: No. 4.
2. Hinges: Manufacturer’s standard concealed spring pin hinge. 322
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3 of 5
3. Latch/Lock:
a. Latch: Cam latch operated by screwdriver with interior release. 1) Provide where access doors are located in private or semi-private areas such as office spaces, storage rooms, equipment rooms, and private toilet rooms.
b. Lock: Manufacturer’s standard key operated cylinder cam lock. Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
1) Provide where access doors are located in public areas such as exterior walls and ceilings, and public toilet rooms.
4. Size: As indicated on drawings or as required to provide access to valves and equipment concealed behind finished surfaces.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold- rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
1. Finish: Directional satin finish, No. 4.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.
B. Size: As indicated on Drawings or size as required for access to concealed spaces, valves, or equipment.
1. Access to attic spaces shall not be less than 22 x 30 inches clear opening.
2. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
C. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 323
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 4 of 5 D. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame.
2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing, mounting holes shall not be located in exposed surfaces of frames.
E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate- free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
2. Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat.
E. Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
324
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 5 of 5 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION
325
326
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 of 15
SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Commercial door hardware for swinging doors.
B. Related Sections include but are not limited to the following:
1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
1.3 REFERENCES AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. Industry standard references and abbreviations shall be as follows:
1. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
2. BHMA: Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
3. CCR: California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code.
4. DHI: Door and Hardware Institute.
5. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
a. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows.
b. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code.
c. NFPA 105: Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
d. NFPA 252: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
6. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
a. UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. b. UL 305: Panic Hardware.
7. WHI: Warnock Hersey Incorporated.
8. SDI: Steel Door Institute.
9. NAAMM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. 327
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 of 15
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: Substitutions will only be allowed by substitution requests submitted in accordance with Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures” prior to the bid date.
1. In Part 2 Articles where manufacturers are listed for various product types and only one manufacturer is listed with no alternate manufacturers indicated, manufacturer listed is an established Owner standard and substitutions will not be allowed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.
Organize schedule vertically into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:
1. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.
2. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.
5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule.
6. Mounting locations for hardware.
7. Door and frame sizes and materials.
8. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number.
9. Keying information.
10. Manufacturer’s catalog cut sheets.
C. Meeting and Conference Minutes: For Keying and Preisntallation conferences.
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.
Include “as installed” final hardware and keying schedule.
E. As-Built Schedule: As-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, wiring diagrams, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier’s final inspection report.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 328
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 of 15
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware with five years documented experience.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware that is similar in quantity, type, and quality to that specified for this Project, and who employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
1. Architectural Hardware Consultant Responsibilities:
a. Detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. b. Meeting with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.
c. Stock parts for products supplied and be capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods.
1.7 CONFERENCES AND MEETINGS
A. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Conference participants shall include Owner’s lock system representative, Supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant Contractor, and Architect. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Attendees shall include Owner, Contractor, Architect, Project Inspector, Installer, and Supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant. Review methods and procedures related to door hardware including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Hardware products and schedule.
2. Installation procedures and coordination required with related work.
3. Review Owner’s keying standards.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations for installation.
329
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 of 15
B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work.
C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, and chemicals.
D. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
E. Deliver permanent keys and cores directly from lock manufacturer to Owner’s designated representative by secured delivery.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Keying: Coordinate keying, and access control with Owner's lock hardware staff and/or consultant.
C. Review, compare, and coordinate scheduled hardware with doors, frames, and adjacent floor and wall conditions for non-compatible mounting and/or operating conditions; notify Architect in writing of any conflicts.
D. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for proper operation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Established from date of Substantial Completion as follows:
a. Closers: Ten (10) years.
b. Locksets: Three (3) years
c. All other hardware: Two (2) years.
330
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 of 15
1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, ANSI A117.1, and the 2019 California Building Code.
1. Opening Hardware, Mounting Height and Operation: Operable parts of door hardware shall be 34 inches minimum and 44 inches above the floor. Hand activated door opening hardware shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist to operate; the force required to activate operable parts shall not exceed 5 lbs. Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. The unlatching of any door or leaf shall not require more than one operation (CBC 11B- 309.4 & 11B-404.2.7, 1010.1.9, 1010.1.9.6).
2. Closers, Opening Force: The opening force shall be the push/pull effort applied perpendicular to the face of the door at the operating hardware. Other than required fire rated doors, the effort to operate doors shall not exceed 5 pounds; the effort to operate required fire rated doors shall be the minimum force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority and shall not exceed 15 pounds (CBC 11B- 404.2.9).
3. Closers, Closing Sweep Period: The closing sweep period for doors shall be such that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch (CBC 11B-404.2.8.1).
4. Thresholds: The height differential between the tops of thresholds and adjacent floor or landing surfaces shall not be more than 1/2 inch; offsets exceeding 1/4 inch shall be beveled with a 2:1 (horizontal to vertical) maximum slope (CBC 11B-404.2.5).
5. Smooth Door Surface: The bottom 10 inches of doors shall have a smooth, uninterrupted surface to allow the door to be opened by a wheel chair footrest without creating a trap or hazardous condition (CBC 11B-404.2.10). 331
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 of 15
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.
1. Where exit devices are indicated on fire-rated door assemblies, provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
C. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke and draft control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Door hardware sets are included in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of this Section; provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the Door Hardware Schedule.
1. Scheduled door hardware is based on products by the manufacturers listed below for various hardware types indicated.
HARDWARE TYPE BASIS OF DESIGN
MANUFACTURER
MANUFACTURERS OF
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
Butt Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley
Continuous Gear Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley
Continuous Pin Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley
Lock and Latch sets,
Cylinders, and Key System
Schlage
Exit Devices Von Duprin
Closers LCN
Door Trim (Pulls, Plates,
Bolts, Coordinators, Stops)
Ives Trimco
Thresholds and Seals Pemko National Guard Products
332
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 of 15
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s approval.
2.3 DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS
A. General: Door hardware products shall comply with preceding “Performance and Regulatory Requirements” Article.
B. Butt Hinges: Full mortise, 3 or 5 knuckle ball bearing hinges with flat button tips, weight as indicated.
1. Size: As indicated in schedule, not less than 4.5 x 4.5 inches.
2. Material:
a. Interior Fire Rated Openings: Steel hinge with steel pin. b. Interior Non-Fire Rated Openings: Steel or Brass hinge with steel pin. c. Exterior Doors: Stainless steel hinge with stainless steel pin, and with non- removable pins.
3. Quantity per Door Leaf:
a. 2 hinges for doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. 3 hinges for doors with heights of 61 to 90 inches.
c. 4 hinges for doors with heights of 91 to 120 inches.
C. Lock and Latch Sets: Cylindrical or mortise latch/lock sets as scheduled with lever handled trim and as follows:
1. Lever Handles: Comply with requirements of SFM Standard 12-10-2, Section 12-10- 202 contained in the CCR, Title 24, part 12, California Referenced Standards Code.
2. Breakaway Exterior Levers: Exterior doors shall be provided with independent security breakaway levers, breakage of outside lever does not allow access to inside lever’s hubworks to gain wrongful entry.
3. Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.
4. Mortise Locksets:
a. Chassis: Cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly. b. Latchbolt and Deadbolt: 3/4 inch minimum latch throw, 1 inch minimum deadbolt throw, stainless steel anti-friction type.
c. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar type levers as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable. 333
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 of 15
d. Furnish solid cylinder collars with wave springs. Wall of collar to cover rim of mortise cylinder.
e. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction and lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. f. Certifications:
1) ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security. 2) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL listed.
5. Cylindrical Locksets: Extra Heavy Duty and as follows:
a. Chassis: Cylindrical design; corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel, through-bolted.
b. Locking Spindle: Stainless steel, integrated spring and spindle design. c. Latch Retractors: Forged steel; balance of inner parts corrosion-resistant plated steel or stainless steel.
d. Latchbolt: Solid steel.
e. Lever Trim: Accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported, minimum 2 inch clearance from lever mid-point to door face. f. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction and lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. g. Certifications:
1) ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 1.
2) UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4ft x 8ft.
D. Exit Devices: Surface mounted rim type exit devices as scheduled.
1. Certifiable by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over 1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 1994 standards.
2. Handing: Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions.
3. Fluid Damper Return: Devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners.
4. Latchbolts: Latchbolts shall be deadlocking with ¾” throw and have a self-lubricating coating to reduce friction and wear.
5. Outside Trim: As scheduled; where operating levers are provided, provide manufacturer’s standard “breakaway” feature for lever trim.
6. Strikes: All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate underneath to prevent movement.
7. Fasteners: Exit Devices to be sex-bolted through doors.
8. Glazing Bead Kits: Furnish glass bead kits where required for doors with glazing.
9. Removable Mullions: Provide keyed removable mullions where indicated for pairs of doors with rim style exit devices.
E. Surface Closers: Fully adjustable full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with cast iron body and non-ferrous cover, heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring, and as follows:
1. ISO 2000 certified; units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
2. Certifiable by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over 10,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.4
334
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 of 15
3. Non-sized, non-handed, and fully adjustable with separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed, and backcheck; and with a fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled.
4. Arms and Mounting: Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non- public side of door, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Regular Arm: Pull side, door mounted, for doors swinging into rooms. b. Parallel Arm: Push side, door mounted, for doors swinging out of rooms. c. Provide extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
d. Supplemental Brackets: Coordinate closer mounting requirements with other hardware items and provide supplemental mounting brackets where required for a complete installation.
5. Fluid: Closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding a temperature range of 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Fluid shall be non-flaming and shall not fuel door or floor covering fires.
6. Fasteners: Closers to be sex-bolted through doors.
F. Door Bolts: For pairs of doors utilizing cylindrical or mortise locksets; provide bolts as scheduled and as follows:
1. Automatic Flush Bolts: Provide automatic flush bolts at pairs of doors from occupiable spaces. Utilize top bolt only models for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by testing procedures.
2. Manual Flush bolts: Provide manual flush bolts only when permitted on storage or mechanical room openings as scheduled.
3. Dust Proof Strikes: Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.
4. Coordinators: Provide coordinators at openings using automatic flush bolts.
G. Stops, Holders, and Bumpers: Provide units as scheduled; all doors shall be provided with a stop or bumper; stops and bumpers shall be mounted within 8 inches of the outside (strike) edge of the door and shall be not more than 4 inches from walls.
1. Overhead Stops: Provide surface mounted overhead stops where floor or wall stops, or closers with stops cannot be utilized.
2. Flip down door mounted stops shall not be allowed.
H. Protection Plates: Kick, armor, or mop plates, 0.050 inch thick stainless steel with four edges beveled, 2 inches less than door width; kick plates to be 10 inches high, mop and armor plate heights shall be as indicated.
I. Lock Protectors: Fabricated from stainless steel with internally threaded fasteners for flat head machine screws through bolted to door; hex head or carriage bolt fasteners will be permitted.
J. Thresholds: Aluminum and as detailed or scheduled; provide at all exterior doors.
K. Door Bottoms and Sweeps: Provide sweep seals at out swinging exterior doors unless other types are scheduled.
335
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 of 15
L. Seals: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated, scheduled, or required for smoke rated openings.
1. Resilient Seal Material: Polyurethane, polypropylene, nylon brush, silicone rubber or solid high-grade neoprene as scheduled. Vinyl seal material shall not be acceptable.
M. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.
2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Review and confirm lock cylinder requirements with Owner.
B. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
2.5 KEYING
A. Review and confirm keying requirements and key system with Owner.
B. Furnish a Grand Master, Master, keyed alike or keyed different system as directed by the Owner or Architect.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where 336
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 of 15
through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Fire-Rated Applications:
a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames.
2) Strike plates to frames.
3) Closers to doors and frames.
b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:
1) Surface hinges to doors.
2) Closers to doors and frames.
3) Surface-mounted exit devices.
3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.
4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
5. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.
6. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.
7. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish.
8. Provide stainless steel expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.
9. All exit devices and lock protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes as indicated in door hardware schedule and as follows:
1. Plated Steel and Brass: Satin chromium US26D (626) unless otherwise noted.
2. Stainless Steel: Satin stainless steel US32D (630) unless otherwise noted.
3. Door Closers: Powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
4. Aluminum: Clear anodized aluminum US28 (628), except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
337
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 of 15
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with Performance and Regulatory Requirements Article and as follows:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
4. Operating hardware shall be located between 34 and 44 inches above the floor to comply with requirements of the California Building Code and the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
D. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
E. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
F. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 338
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 of 15
G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors in a full bed of butyl-rubber sealant, secure to concrete substrates with 1/4 inch diameter stainless steel flat head sleeve anchors equally spaced not more than 12 inches on center and not more than 3 inches from ends.
H. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost to the owner.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Approximately 2 weeks prior to completion or occupancy, check each operating item of door hardware for each door to ensure proper operation or function; adjust operational hardware as needed for proper operation. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Adjust door latches and closers with heating and ventilating equipment fans in operation in order to compensate for room-to-room or room-to-exterior air pressure differences.
2. Door Closers: Adjust door closers so that the effort to operate doors shall not exceed a 5 pound force for non-fire rated doors; the force for fire rated doors shall be the minimum force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority and shall not exceed 15 pounds; the force shall be the push/pull effort applied at right angles to hinged doors (CBC 11B-404.2.9). Adjust the sweep period for closers so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch (CBC 11B-404.2.8.1).
B. Occupancy Adjustment and Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor, accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit; re-adjust hardware items to restore proper functions. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 339
22-12479 – Ph 2 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 of 15
3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruct Owner's Personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes during the final adjustment of hardware.
3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The items listed in the following Hardware Sets shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specifications.
B. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates hardware sets for each door.
C. Abbreviations for Manufacturers:
GJ = Glyyn-Johnson Overhead stops, coordinators
IVE = Ives Hinges, Door trim, bolts, plates
LCN = LCN Door Closers
PEM = Pemko Thresholds, Gasketing & Weatherstrip
SCH = Schlage Lock Company Locks, Latches & Cylinders
VON = Von Duprin Exit Devices
D. Door Hardware Sets:
Door hardware sets to be issued via addendum during bidding. 340
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 1 of 11
SECTION 088000
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Glass for windows.
a. Glass Types are indicate d in glass type schedules at the end of this Section.
2. Glazing sealants and accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product ; include state ment of VOC content for any adhesives or sealants.
B. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
341
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 2 of 11
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project ; whose work has resulted in installations with a record o f successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are experienced in installing glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified in dependent t esting agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with re asonable tolerances.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufa cturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambie nt and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits per mitted by gl azing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and subs trate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by g lazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that det eriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 342
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 3 of 11
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period.
Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed f rom normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Products: Where products are identified by manufacturer and product names, Design, Drawings, and Specifications are b ased on the product indicated ; subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Guardian Industries.
2. Oldcastle Building Envelope.
3. Pilkington Building Products North America.
4. Vitro Architectural Glass (Formerly PPG Industries, Inc.)
5. Viracon, Inc.
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain glass fro m a single source from a single manufacturer for each glass type.
1. Obtain tinted glass from a single source from a single manufacturer.
2. Obtain reflective-coated glass from a single source from a single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessorie s: Obtain accessories from a single source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass brea kage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, California Energy Code.
1. NFRC 100: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors.”
2. NFRC 200 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficients at Normal Incidence.”
3. NFRC 400: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Air Leakage.” 343
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 4 of 11
C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design lo ads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the C alifornia Building Code and ASTM E 1300.
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center - of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short- side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.
3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresse s induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.
D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite.
3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with publ ished recommendations of glass prod uct manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publication: "Glazing Manual."
2. IGMA Publication for Insulat ing Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North Ame rican Glazing Guidelines for Sea led Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
B. Safety Glazing Identification: Where safety glazing is indicated, each pane of safety glazing shall be identified by a manufactu rer’s designation specifying who applied the designation, the manufacturer or installer and the safety glazing standard with which it complies, as well as the information specified in CBC Section 2403.1. The designa tion shall be acid etched, sand blasted, ceramic fired, laser etched, embossed, or of a type that once ap plied cannot be removed without being destroyed. A label meeting the requirements of CBC Section 2406.3 shall be permitted in lieu of the manufacturer ’s designation.
C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on sp acers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 344
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 5 of 11
D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm.
2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.
E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is ind icated, provide annealed float glass, heat - strengthened fl oat glass, or ful ly tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat -strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.
2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality-Q3.
B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.
C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
D. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
E. Wire Glass: Clear polished wire glass to match existing conditions, 1/4 inch thickness.
2.5 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Uni ts: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary seals.
2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spac er material and construction, aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish.
3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. 345
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 6 of 11
B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in Part 3 Article "Insulating Glass Schedule."
1. Provide Kind HS (Heat-strengthened) or Kind FT (Fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to r esist thermal stresse s induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of ins ulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as de monstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
3. VOC Content: Field applied sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected b y A rchitect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealan t complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
2.7 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent soli ds elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, fo r glazing applications in which ta pe is not subject to continuous pressure.
346
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 7 of 11
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foa m ta pes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in whic h tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is u sed in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of materia l, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primer s, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer; EPDM, Silicone, Neoprene, or Santoprene; with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Type recomme nded by sealant or g lass manufacturer; neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to mai ntain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Type recommended by seal ant or g lass manufacturer; EPDM, Si licone, Neoprene, or Santoprene; with a Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer’s written instructions.
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glaz ing sealant depth and otherwise pro duce optimum glazing sealant performance.
2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and refer enced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
1. Allow for thermal m ovements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 347
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 8 of 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and st ops, with Insta ller present, for c ompliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges f rom damage during h andling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when in stalled, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants.
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless oth erwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in th in course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lights.
F. Provide spacers for glass lights where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly o pposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated a bility to 348
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 9 of 11
maintain required face clearance s and to comply with system perfor mance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to preve nt glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provi de adequate anc horage so gasket ca nnot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
K. Square cut wedge -shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing j oints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in t apes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until immediately before each glazing unit i s installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 349
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 10 of 11
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive -in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and pr ess firmly agai nst soft compressio n gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openin gs on setting blocks and press firmly against soft c ompression gask et. Install dense c ompression gaskets and pressure -glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with seala nt recommended by g asket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backin g, between glass lights and glazing stops to maintain g lass face clear ances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance fo r optimum seala nt performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete an d other masonry surfaces at freque nt intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove subst ances immediate ly a s recommended i n writing by glass 350
22-12479 – Ph 2 GLAZING 088000 - 11 of 11
manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
3.8 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type CG: Clear float glass.
1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.
B. Glass Type TG: Clear fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.
2. Safety glazing required.
C. Glass Type WG: Clear polished wire glass.
1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.
3.9 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type IW-1: Insulating glass with wire glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-inch (25mm).
2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
3. Outdoor Lite: Clear polished wire glass.
4. Indoor Lite: Clear annealed float glass.
5. Interspace Content: Clean-Dry-Air.
END OF SECTION
351
352
22-12479 – Ph 2 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 of 8
SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Interior gypsum board.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board.
2. Division 09 Section “Painting” for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data for each type of product indicated or incorporated into the Work.
1. Include statement of VOC content for any adhesives or sealants.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. 353
22-12479 – Ph 2 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 of 8
B. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
1. Width: 4 feet.
2. Length: 8, 10, or 12 feet.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Gypsum Co.
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC.
3. Lafarge North America Inc.
4. National Gypsum Company.
5. PABCO Gypsum.
6. USG Corporation.
B. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M of the following types:
1. Type X:
a. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
2. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
a. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
c. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
354
22-12479 – Ph 2 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 of 8
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes: As required for project conditions, including but not limited to the following:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
1. Coordinate primers with Division 09 Section “Painting.” 355
22-12479 – Ph 2 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 of 8
B. Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application.
1. Texture: Light spatter.
2. Where Work is adjacent to existing gypsum board surfaces, match existing texture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 356
22-12479 – Ph 2 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 of 8
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Fastening Gypsum Board Panels: Comply with fastening requirements of ASTM C 840 unless more stringent fastening requirements are required for fire resistance rated gypsum board assemblies as indicated on Drawings. Fasten gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws as follows:
1. Fastener Spacing, Single Layer Gypsum Board Application:
a. Ceilings: Space fasteners 12 inches on center maximum. b. Walls: Space fasteners 12 inches on center maximum where studs are spaced 24 inches on center; fastener spacing may be increased to 16 inches on center where studs are spaced 16 inches on center. c. Edge Distance: Space fasteners 3/8 inches minimum from panel edges.
2. Attachment to Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
3. Where gypsum panels are installed over structural sheathing or acoustical board panels, increase the length of fasteners an amount equal to not less than the thickness of the sheathing or panels.
I. Coordinate gypsum panel installation with insulation work specified in Division 07 Section “Blanket Insulation.”
1. Thermal and sound attenuation batt/blanket insulation shall be installed before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side of framing members.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Type X: Unless otherwise indicated.
2. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Type: At walls of toilet and janitor rooms, walls within 2 feet (horizontally) of plumbing fixtures, and other locations as indicated on Drawings.
357
22-12479 – Ph 2 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 of 8
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) using continuous panels without abutting end joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated design.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls where the vertical dimension of the wall without horizontal offsets exceeds the maximum available panel length, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated design.
3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges where LC-Bead cannot be used.
4. U-Bead: Use where indicated.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
358
22-12479 – Ph 2 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7 of 8
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840 and the Gypsum Association:
1. Level 1: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound; surface shall be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
a. Locations: Concealed areas and areas above ceilings.
2. Level 2: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one separate coat of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; surface shall be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
a. Locations: Panels that are substrate for applied rigid panels having a thickness not less than 3/8 inches.
3. Level 3: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two (2) separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; all joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
a. Locations: Not used unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
4. Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and Three (3) separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; all joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
a. Locations: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view and painted or will be substrates for wall coverings.
b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Division 09 Section “Painting.”
c. Where suspended ceilings are to be installed, wall finish shall extend not less than 6 inches above the ceiling height.
5. Level 5: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and Three (3) separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; a thin skim coat of joint compound or similar material specific for this purpose shall be applied to the entire surface; the surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. a. Locations: Not used unless otherwise indicated on Drawings b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Division 09 Section “Painting.”
359
22-12479 – Ph 2 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 8 of 8
3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes prior to application of finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means.
If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
360
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 of 9 SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for acoustical joint sealant.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include statement of VOC content for any adhesives or sealants.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes.
C. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.
D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to not less than 2 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to not less than 2 percent of quantity installed.
361
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 of 9
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Ceiling System Components: Ceiling system components shall comply with ASTM C 635 and Section 5.1 of ASTM E 580.
B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceiling systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and the California Building Code.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Source Limitations, Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Obtain acoustical panels from a single source from a single manufacturer.
362
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 of 9 B. Manufacturer, Basis-of-Design Products: Where named manufacturer’s products are indicated, Drawings and Specifications are based on products manufactured by:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or comparable products by one of the following:
1) BPB USA.
2) CertainTeed Corp.
3) USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
D. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
E. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.
F. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
G. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
H. Acoustical Panel Types:
1. Type ACP-1: Armstrong World Industries; Cortega, No. 769. a. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
b. Pattern: Medium fissured (ASTM E1264 pattern C D).
c. Size: 24 x 48 x 5/8 inches.
d. Edge: Square.
e. Color: White.
f. LR: Not less than 0.82.
g. NRC: Not less than 0.55.
363
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 of 9
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Source Limitations, Suspension Systems: Obtain suspensions systems from a single source from a single manufacturer.
B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M, and Section 5.1 of ASTM E580.
1. Main runners, cross runners, splices, expansion devices, and intersection connectors shall be designed to carry a mean ultimate test load of not less than 180 lbs in compression and tension per ASTM E 580 Section 5.1.2.
C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
6. Basis of Design: Design, Drawings, and Specifications are based on the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Prelude XL (ESR-1308).
1) Main Runners: No. 7301.
2) Cross Runners: No. XL7341 (4’), XL7328 (2’).
3) Perimeter Seismic Clips: No. BERC2.
D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard roll formed sheet metal angle edge molding and trim with hemmed edges having nominal 7/8 inch legs, that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated, and comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1. Perimeter Seismic Clips: Provide manufacturer’s proprietary perimeter seismic clips at ends of main and cross runners at wall angles to comply with seismic standards indicated.
2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.
3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.
364
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5 of 9
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Attachment Devices: As indicated on Drawings; attachment devices to be sized for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Screws: Comply with ASTM C1513-10, ASME B18.6.4-89 (R2005).
Penetration of screws through joined material shall be not less than three exposed threads.
C. Hanger and Brace Wires: Class 1 zinc-coated (galvanized) carbon-steel wire conforming to ASTM A 641-09a; wire to be 12 gauge (0.106 inch diameter) with soft temper and minimum tensile strength of not less than 70 ksi.
D. Seismic Struts: Metal stud sections of size indicated on Drawings of galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653-11, or other equivalent sheet steel listed in Section A2.1 of the North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members 2007, including supplement 2 dated 2010 (AISI S100-07/S2-10).
Material 43 mil (18 gauge) and lighter shall have a minimum yield strength of 33 ksi; material 54 mil (16 gauge) and heavier shall have a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi.
E. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants." Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.
2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant.
3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
365
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6 of 9 B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M, Section
5.2 of ASTM E 580, and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGER AND BRACE WIRES
A. Anchors and/or Clips for Hanger and Brace Wires: Anchors and/or Clips for hanger and brace wires shall be installed in such a manner that the direction of the anchor/clip aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the wire.
B. Hanger Wires: Suspend ceiling hanger wires from the building's structural members and attach to grid members as indicated on Drawings and as follows:
1. Install hanger wires spaced not more than 4 feet on center along main runners and not more than 8 inches from ends of runners at the perimeter of the ceiling.
2. Install hanger wires at cross runners at the perimeter of the ceiling area not more than 8 inches from edges or one-fourth the length of the runner whichever is least. Perimeter wires are not required when the length of the runner is 8 inches or less.
3. Install hanger wires plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within the space above the ceiling that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. Hanger wires shall be separated from unbraced pipes, ducts, conduits, and similar items a minimum of 6 inches.
4. Secure hanger wires to ceiling suspension grid members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns in 3 inches. Hanger wire loops shall be tightly wrapped and sharply bent to prevent any vertical movement or rotation of the member within the loops.
5. Hanger wires shall not attach to or bend around interfering material or equipment. Provide trapeze or other supplementary support members at obstructions to typical hanger spacing.
6. Provide additional hangers, struts, or braces as required at all ceiling breaks, soffits, or discontinuous areas.
366
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7 of 9
7. Splay hanger wires only where required to miss obstructions; hanger wires that are more than one horizontal to 6 vertical out of plumb shall have counter sloping wires. Counter sloping wires are not required at perimeter hanger wires at main runners that are positively attached to the perimeter wall closure angle.
C. Seismic Bracing/Hanger Wires and Compression Struts: Seismic bracing shall consist of a compression strut and sets of 4 splayed brace wires oriented 90 degrees from each other attached to suspension grid main runners and the structure above as indicated on Drawings and as follows:
1. Space bracing assemblies not more than 12 feet on center each way and not more than 6 feet from walls.
2. Secure brace wires to ceiling suspension main runners and to building structural members above with a minimum of four tight turns in 1-1/2 inches. a. Brace wires shall attach to main runners within 2 inches of the intersection of main and cross runners.
b. The slope of brace wires shall not exceed 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling.
c. Brace wires shall be separated from unbraced pipes, ducts, conduits, and similar items a minimum of 6 inches.
3. Compression struts shall attach to ceiling grid main runners at the intersection of the brace wires and shall be installed not more than 1 horizontal to 6 vertical out of plumb.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GRID MEMBERS AND WALL TRIM
A. Edge Molding and Trim: Install trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Positively attach trim to the wall as indicated on Drawings.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 24 inches on center and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
B. Suspension Grid Members: Install suspension grid members so they are level, square, and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
1. Install grid members to form standard 2 foot x 4 foot or 2 foot by 2 foot grid layout as indicated on Drawings.
a. Main runners shall be spaced 4 feet on center and shall be supported by hanger wires spaced not more than 4 feet on center along the main runner. b. 4 foot long cross runners shall be installed perpendicular to main runners and spaced 24 inches on center.
367
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 8 of 9 c. 2 foot long cross runners shall be installed perpendicular to the 4 foot cross runners at the mid-point of the 4 foot cross runners (For 2 foot by 2 foot grid layouts).
2. Grid members shall be attached to metal wall angle trim two adjacent walls per ASTM E 580, Section 5.2.3; grid members shall be at least 3/4 inches clear of other walls.
a. Proprietary seismic clips shall be installed at each grid member at walls of the ceiling area where grid members are not connected to the adjacent wall angle trim; seismic clips shall be securely fastened to the wall; seismic clips shall allow the grid member 3/4 inch movement in compression and in tension.
3. Expansion joints shall be provided between grid members at the intersections of corridors and at the junctions of corridors and lobbies or similar areas.
4. Seismic separations shall be provided to divide large ceiling areas into smaller areas so that no undivided ceiling area exceeds 2,500 sf. Alternately, comply with ASTM E 580, Section 5.2.9.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTIC CEILING PANELS
A. Acoustic Panels: Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.
2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3. Provide oversize penetrations through ceiling panels for sprinkler heads and similar rigid penetrating items that are not connected to the ceiling system; penetrations shall be 2 inches minimum oversized to allow for horizontal movement of 1 inch in all directions.
a. Penetrations shall be finished with escutcheons to seal off oversized openings; escutcheons shall allow for movement of 1 inch minimum in all directions
b. Flexible pipe penetrations shall not require oversize openings.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Light Fixtures: All light fixtures shall be positively attached to the ceiling suspension system by mechanical means per CEC Article 410.36 to resist a horizontal force equal the weight of the fixture. A minimum of two screws or approved fasteners are required at each light fixture per ASTM E 580, Section 5.3.1.
368
22-12479 – Ph 2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 9 of 9 B. Fire Sprinklers: If provided, flexible sprinkler hose fittings shall be positively attached to the ceiling suspension system by mechanical means to resist a horizontal force equal to the weight of the component; screws or approved fasteners are required. A minimum of 2 attachment points are required at each component.
C. Air Terminals and Other Services: Ceiling mounted air terminals and/or other services shall be positively attached to the ceiling suspension system by mechanical means to resist a horizontal force equal to the weight of the component; screws or approved fasteners are required. A minimum of 2 attachment points are required at each component.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
369
22-12479 – Ph 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 of 5 SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Include statement of VOC content for any adhesives or sealants.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For color and texture for each product indicated.
C. Product Schedule: For resilient products, use same designations as Contract Documents.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 370
22-12479 – Ph 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 of 5
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
3. Roppe Corporation, USA.
B. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).
1. Style: Cove (base with toe).
2. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
3. Height: 4 inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
4. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long, or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
5. Outside Corners: Preformed.
6. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
7. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
3. Roppe Corporation, USA.
371
22-12479 – Ph 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 of 5 B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Flooring terminations, transitions, reducer strips, and accessories as indicated and/or required for project conditions.
1. Material: Rubber.
2. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated in Drawings and/or as required for project conditions.
3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Cove Base Adhesives: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor and Stair Tread Adhesives: VOC content of not more than 60 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 372
22-12479 – Ph 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 of 5 C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Outside Corners: Install preformed corners; install corners before installing straight pieces.
H. Inside Corners: Install preformed or job formed inside corners.
1. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
2. Job-Formed Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form returns with not than 6 inches in length, miter corners to minimize open joints.
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
373
22-12479 – Ph 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5 of 5 B. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces immediately after completing resilient product installation:
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION
374
375
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 1 of 17
SECTION 099100
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting, staining or refinishing of the following:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include but are not limited to the following:
1. Division 08 Sections for shop priming of metal doors and frames with primers specified in this Section.
2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing gypsum board surfaces before application of surface textures with primers/sealers specified in this Section.
3. Division 21 through 23 Sections for additional requirements for painting of plumbing and mechanical items.
4. Division 26 through 28 Sections for additional requirements for painting of electrical items.
1.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Unauthorized removal or disconnecting of electrical fixtures, switches, or control devices may result in additional electrical work to comply with energy regulations of governing agencies.
Contractor shall be financially responsible with no additional cost to the Owner for additional electrical work due to unauthorized removal or disconnecting of electrical fixtures, switches, or control devices.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of gloss levels below are from "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" (hereafter, "MPI Manual").
1. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
376
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 2 of 17
2. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
3. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
4. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
5. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
6. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on 8 inch square samples of actual material to be painted or stained. For masonry surfaces, include a mortar joint.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. VOC content.
E. Coating Maintenance Manual: Submit with Closeout/Maintenance Submittals a Coating Maintenance manual; manual shall include a floor plan with rooms identified by name and number, a finish schedule coordinated with the floor plan, designations of where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
377
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 3 of 17
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
3. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C. Protection:
1. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades, work not to be painted concurrently, landscaping, and adjacent property from damage.
2. When not in use, store paints in designated areas. Keep containers closed. At end of day's work, remove empty containers, paint soaked rags, and debris. Vent fumes. Take precautions to prevent fire.
D. Sequencing, Scheduling:
1. Coordinate removal and replacement of hardware, electrical fixtures and trim, and related work of other Sections.
2. Stain, prime, back paint, and pre-finish items before installation as required. 378
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 4 of 17
E. Cleaning and Disposal:
1. Do not use Project plumbing fixtures or piping systems for:
a. Cleaning painting equipment and utensils.
b. Disposal of waste from cleaning or disposal of paints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Scheduled Paint Systems: Provide paint systems as scheduled on the Drawings and listed in Part 3 Article “Paint Systems” to comply with requirements in this Section.
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designations indicated in the scheduled paint systems are for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements; unless otherwise indicated, paint products are based on products manufactured by the following:
a. Sherwin Williams Paints.
1) Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products or comparable products by one of the following:
a) Dunn-Edwards Paints.
b) Glidden Professional.
c) PPG Paints.
d) Tnemec.
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
1. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
C. VOC Content: Paints and coatings applied at the Project site shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction; VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); and VOC limits of the California Green Building Standards Code (CGBSC), Section 5.504.4.3 and Table 504.4.3 as follows:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
379
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 5 of 17
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
3. Nonflat High-Gloss Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
4. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
5. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.
7. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
8. Rust Preventative Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
11. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
12. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 275 g/L.
13. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 275 g/L.
14. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.
D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health’ "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. Colors shall be factory mixed and match approved samples.
2.3 INTUMESCENT PAINTS
A. Intumescent Paint: Water based latex post treatment interior fire retardant intumescent paint; non-toxic and mold resistant.
1. Product: Flame Stop Inc.; Flame Stop IM.
2. Flame Spread: Zero (0) per ASTM E 84; 30 Minute Test Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. VOC Content: Not more than 50 g/L.
4. Applied Thickness: Two coats, each coat applied at a rate of 200 sf/gal.
5. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
6. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by intumescent paint manufacturer; use where manufacturer recommends use of a primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 380
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 6 of 17
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
G. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect of anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. Electrical Items: Remove only switch and outlet cover plates and similar items that do not require disconnecting wiring. Do not disconnect wiring or remove electrical fixtures, switches, or control devices unless otherwise indicated on Electrical Drawings. a. Contractor may be subject to additional costs due to unauthorized removal of items, refer to Part 1 Article “Special Requirements.”
2. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. 381
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 7 of 17
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
2. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
D. Concrete and Masonry Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Perform appropriate tests to determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces; testing shall be performed or witnessed by a certified representative of the paint manufacturer.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Cracks and defects at concrete and masonry surfaces shall be filled with cement grout; match surface texture.
2. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1. Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC), SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
I. Wood Substrates: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required.
1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
a. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. b. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside.
c. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
382
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 8 of 17
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
J. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
K. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
L. Drywall: Fill any cracks or defects with drywall joint compound. Sand any rough spots smooth.
Do not raise nap on paper covering.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." Paint/stain exposed surfaces, except where schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted/stained or is to remain natural. If schedules do not specifically mention an item or surface to be painted, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.
4. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
7. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
8. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
383
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 9 of 17
9. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
a. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
1) Aluminum storefronts and entrances.
2) Anodized aluminum gypsum board and plaster trim.
3) Acoustical wall panels.
4) Toilet and urinal partitions.
5) Stainless steel items.
6) Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
7) Light fixtures.
8) Distribution cabinets.
b. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
384
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 10 of 17
F. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
G. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.
I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
N. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: Paint the following work where exposed to view at applications indicated:
1. Equipment rooms:
a. Telecommunications backboards; paint with intumescent paint. 385
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 11 of 17
2. Occupied areas:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Ducts, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.
i. Other items as directed by Architect.
3. Exterior locations:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
E. Correction of Defective Work:
1. Repair abraded, damaged or incomplete paint surfaces by methods acceptable to Architect. Spot repairs to be well-blended into adjacent work. For large repairs, re-coat entire plane or building element in which damaged area occurs.
2. Defaced surfaces of work not to be painted shall be cleaned and their original finish restored.
F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
386
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 12 of 17
3.5 PAINT SYSTEMS
(Interior and exterior paint systems are on the following pages) 387
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 13 of 17
A. Interior Paint Systems:
SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM COATS MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
(1) Gypsum
Drywall
P12.A Flat, Latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B28
B30
B30
ProMar 200 Zero Primer
ProMar 200 Zero Flat
ProMar 200 Zero Flat
P12.B Semi-Gloss
Latex
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B28
B31
B31
ProMar 200 Zero Primer
ProMar 200 Zero SG
ProMar 200 Zero SG
P12.C Eggshell
Enamel Latex
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
061
B20
B20
ProMar 200 Zero Primer
ProMar 200 Zero EG
ProMar 200 Zero EG
(Textured) P12.D Flat One Coat A44 Tuff Surface
(2) Wood P13.A Semi-Gloss
Latex
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B28
B31
B31
Premium Wall & Wood
ProMar 200 Zero SG
ProMar 200 Zero SG
P13.B Eggshell
Enamel, Latex
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
168
A75
A75
Premium Wall & Wood
Solo EG
Solo EG
P13.C Lacquer Velvet Stain
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
15700
27520
27520
Minwax 250
Sanding Sealer
High Solids Velvet Lacquer
High Solids Velvet Lacquer
P13.D Lacquer Semi-
Gloss
Stain
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
15700
27540
27590
Minwax 250
Sanding sealer
High Solids S.G. Lacquer
High Solids S.G. Lacquer
P13.E Lacquer Gloss Stain
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
15700
27590
27590
Minwax 250
Sanding Sealer
High Solids Gloss Lacquer
High Solids Gloss Lacquer
P13.F Varnish Velvet Stain
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
A68
A68
A68
Minwax 250
Wood Classics
Wood Classics
Wood Classics
P13.G Varnish Semi-
Gloss
Stain
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
A68
A68
A68
Minwax 250
Wood Classics
Wood Classics
Wood Classics
(2A) Telecom
Plywood
Backboard
P13.H Intumescent
Paint
Primer
First Coat
Second Coat
(Primer if req. by intumescent
paint mfr)
Flame Stop IM
Flame Stop IM
388
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 14 of 17
SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM COATS MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
(3) Ferrous
Metal
P14.A Flat Latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66310
A74
A74
ProCryl Metal Primer
Solo Flat
SoloFlat
P14.B Semi-Gloss
Latex
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66310
A76
A76
ProCryl Metal Primer
Solo SG
Solo SG
Ferrous
Metal
(Cont.)
P14.C Eggshell Latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66310
A75
A75
ProCryl Metal Primer
Solo EG
Solo EG
(4) Galvanized
Metal/
Aluminum
P15.A Flat Latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66310
A74
A74
ProCryl Metal Primer
Solo Flat
Solo Flat
P15.B Semi-Gloss
Latex
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66310
A76
A76
ProCryl Metal Primer
Solo SG
Solo SG
P15.C Eggshell Latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66310
A75
A75
ProCryl Metal Primer
Solo EG
Solo EG
(5) Plaster,
Concrete,
Brick
P16.A Flat Latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
B30
B30
Loxon
ProMar 200 Zero Flat
ProMar 200 ZeroFlat
P16.B Semi-Gloss
Latex
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
B31
B31
Loxon
ProMar 200 Zero SG
ProMar 200 Zero SG
P16.C Eggshell Latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
B20
B20
Loxon
ProMar 200 Zero EG
ProMar 200 Zero EG
(6) Concrete
Block
P17.A Flat latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B25
B30
B30
PrepRite Block Filler
ProMar 200 Zero Flat
ProMar 200 Zero Flat
P17.B Semi-Gloss
Latex
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B25
B31
B31
PrepRite Block Filler
ProMar 200 Zero SG
ProMar 200 Zero SG
P17.C Eggshell Latex First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B25
B20
B20
PrepRite Block Filler
ProMar 200 Zero
ProMar 200 Zero
(7) Acoustical
Ceiling Tile/
Plaster
P18.A Latex One Coat to
Cover
A21 EcoSelect
(8) Ceramic
Tile like
Finishes
P19.A Epoxy First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B51
B73
B73
Multi Purpose Primer
PI water based Epoxy
PI water based Epoxy
389
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 15 of 17
SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM COATS MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
(9) Ceiling and
Wall w/
misc. Pipes
& Conduit
Exposed,
Trusses &
Beams
w/Spray-on
Fire
Insulation
P20.A Latext Dry Fall One Coat B42 PI Water based Dryfall White or Black
(10) Floor
Coating,
concrete or
wood
P21.A 2 Part Epoxy
Floor Coating,
Semi-Gloss
First Coat
Second Coat
8100
8100
Armorseal 8100 Water Based
Epoxy Floor Coating
Armorseal 8100 Water Based
Epoxy Floor Coating
(11) Various
(Smoke
Damage)
P22.a Shellac Primer Two Coats White Pigmented Shellac Primer B49W08050
(Exterior Paint Systems start on the following page)
390
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 16 of 17
B. Exterior Paint Systems:
SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM COATS MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
(1) Plaster,
Concrete
P50.A Flat, Acrylic First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
A6
A6
Loxon
A-100
A-100
P50.B Low Sheen
Enamel Acrylic
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
126
126
Loxon
A-100
A-100
P50.C Elastomeric
(Smooth)
5 year labor
warranty
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
(Spray App.)
LX02
CF12C
F12
Loxon Masonry Primer
Conflex XL
Conflex XL
P50.D Elastomeric
(Medium
Aggregate)
5 year labor
warranty
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
CF12
CF12
Loxon Masonry Primer
Conflex XL
Conflex XL
(2) Concrete
Block
Masonry
P51.A Flat, acrylic
emulsion
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B25
A6
A6
PrepRite Block Filler
A-100
A-100
P51.B Elastomeric
Smooth
5 year labor
warranty
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
CF12
CF12
Loxon Masonry Primer
Conflex XL
Conflex XL
P51.C Elastomeric
(Medium
Aggregate)
5 year labor
warranty
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
CF12
CF12
Loxon Masonry Primer
Conflex XL
Conflex XL
P51.D Elastomeric
(Coarse
Aggregate)
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
LX02
CF12
CF12
Loxon Masonry Primer
Conflex XL
Conflex XL
P51.E Clear Water
Repellent
10 year
Warranty
1 Coat LX31 Loxon 40% Water Repellant
(A31T40)
(3) Wood P53.A Flat Acrylic
Emulsion
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B42
A6
A6
Exterior Wood Primer
A-100
A-100
P53.B Semi-Gloss
Acrylic
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B42
A76
A76
Exterior Wood Primer
Solo SG
Solo SG
P53.C Low Sheen
Enamel Acrylic
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B42
A75
A75
Exterior Wood Primer
Solo LS
Solo LS
391
22-12479 – Ph 2 PAINTING 099100 - 17 of 17
SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM COATS MANUFACTURER’S DESIGNATION
(3)
(Cont.)
Wood P53.D Flat, Stain,
Water Base,
Semi-Transp.
First Coat
Second Coat
A15T
A15T
Deckscapes ST Stain
Deckscapes ST Stain
(A15T00215)
P53.E Flat, Stain
Opaque
First Coat
Second Coat
A6
A6
A100
A100
P53.F Varnish Clear
Gloss
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
6509
6509
6509
McCloskey’s Spar
McCloskey’s Spar
McCloskey`s Spar
P53.G Stain and
Varnish
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
6509
6509
Aqua Seal
McCloskey’s
McCloskey’s
(4) Ferrous
Metal
P55.D Gloss,
High Perform.
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
646
B65
B65
Macropoxy Epoxy
Acrolon 100
Acrolon 100
P55.E Semi-Gloss
High Perform.
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66-
310
B66
B66
ProCryl Primer
Pro Ind DTM Acrylic
Pro Ind DTM Acrylic
(5) Galv. Metal
&
Aluminum
P56.A Gloss First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66-
310
A77
A77
ProCryl Primer
Solo GL
Solo GL
P56.B Flat, Acrylic First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66-
310
A74
A74
ProCryl Primer
Solo Flat
Solo Flat
P56.C Semi-Gloss
Enamel Acrylic
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66-
310
B53
B53
ProCryl Primer
PI WB Urethan Enamel
PI WB Urethan Enamel
P56.D Gloss First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66-
310
A77
A77
ProCryl Primer
Solo GL
Solo GL
P56.E Semi Gloss First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B66-
310
A76
A76
ProCryl Primer
Solo S/G
SoloS/G
(6) Galv. Metal
&
Aluminum
P57.C Gloss
High Perform.
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
646
B65
B65
Marcopoxy Epoxy
Acrolon 100 High Gloss Acrolon
100 High Gloss
High Perf. P57.D Semi-Gloss
High Perform.
First Coat
Second Coat
Third Coat
B71Y1
B66
B66
DTM Wash Primer
Pro Ind DTM Acrylic
Pro Ind DTM Acrylic
END OF SECTION
392
393
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 1 of 10
SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior and exterior panel signs for room or space identification.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22, 23, and 26 Sections as applicable to Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical Work for tags and nameplates for equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data including construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and full-scale template layout of characters and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, and Braille layout.
C. Schedule: Schedule indicating sign locations, type, other pertinent data, and referenced to rooms or doors with the same referencing as used on the Drawings.
D. Braille Text Certification: Provide certification from the sign manufacturer that Braille text complies with regulatory requirements indicated (Contracted (Grade 2) per CBC Section 11B-703.3).
E. Braille Text Translation Confirmation: Provide confirmation of Braille text translations.
F. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for each type of sign and material indicated.
394
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 2 of 10
G. Samples for Verification: Provide 2 full size sample signs showing edge and corner condition, border, text characters of height specified, Braille text, and selected colors, of each type of sign indicated. Sample will be retained by Architect.
H. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.
2. Warranty Period for Interior Signs: Building lifetime.
3. Warranty Period for Exterior Signs: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR SIGNS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the following:
1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
2. ANSI A117.1.
3. California Building Code, Sections 11B-216 and 11B-703.
B. Room or Space Identification Signs, CBC 11B-216.2: Where provided, signs identifying permanent rooms and spaces shall comply with CBC Sections 11B-703.1, 11B-703.2, 11B-703.3, and 11B-703.5. Where pictograms are provided as designations of permanent rooms and spaces, the pictograms shall comply with CBC Section 11B-703.6 and shall have text descriptors complying with CBC Sections 11B-703.2 and 11B-703.5. Exterior signs that are not located at the door to the space they serve shall not be required to comply with CBC Section 11B-703.2.
395
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 3 of 10
C. Directional and Informational Signs, CBC 11B-216.3: Signs that provide direction to or information about spaces and facilities shall comply with CBC Section 11B-703.5.
D. Means of Egress Signs, CBC 11B-216.4: Tactile exit signs required by CBC Section 1013.4 at doors to exit passageways, exit discharge, and exit stairways shall comply with CBC Sections 11B-703.1, 11B-703.2, 11B-703.3, and 11B-703.5.
E. Inspection, CBC 11B-703.1.1.2: Signs and identification devices shall be field inspected after installation and approved by the enforcing agency prior to the issuance of a final certificate of occupancy per Chapter 1, Division II, Section 111, or final approval where no certificate of occupancy is issued. The inspection shall include, but not be limited to, verification that Braille dots and cells are properly spaced and the size, proportion and type of raised characters are in compliance with the regulations of CBC Section 11B-703.
F. Raised Characters, CBC 11B-703.2: Raised characters shall comply with CBC Section 11B-703.2 and shall be duplicated in Braille complying with CBC Section 11B-703.3.
Raised characters shall be installed in accordance with CBC 11B-703.4.
1. Depth: Raised characters shall be raised 1/32-inch minimum above their background.
2. Case: Raised characters shall be upper case.
3. Style: Raised characters shall be sans serif. Characters shall not be italic, oblique, script, highly decorative, or other unusual forms.
4. Character Proportions: Raised characters (Text) on signs shall be selected from fonts where the width of the uppercase letter “O” is 60 percent minimum and 110 percent maximum of the height of the uppercase letter “I”.
5. Character Height: Character height measured vertically from the baseline of the character shall be of 5/8-inch minimum and 2-inches maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter “I”.
6. Stroke Thickness: Stroke thickness of the uppercase letter “I” shall be 15 percent maximum of the height of the character.
7. Character Spacing: Character spacing shall be measured between the two closest points of adjacent raised characters within a message, excluding word spaces.
Where characters have rectangular cross sections, spacing between individual raised characters shall be 1/8 inch minimum and 4 times the raised character stroke width maximum. Where characters have other cross sections, spacing between individual raised characters shall be 1/16 inch minimum and 4 times the raised character stroke width maximum at the base of the cross sections, and 1/8 inch minimum and 4 times the raised character ma stroke width maximum at the top of the cross sections. Characters shall be separated from raised borders and decorative elements 3/8 inch minimum.
8. Line Spacing: Spacing between the baselines of separate lines of raised characters within a message shall be 135 percent minimum and 170 percent maximum of the raised character height.
9. Format: Text shall be in a horizontal format.
10. Finish and Contrast: Characters and their background shall have a non-glare finish.
Characters shall contrast with their background with either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. Requirement applies to all signs.
396
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 4 of 10
G. Braille, CBC 11B-703.3: Braille shall be contracted (Grade 2) and shall comply with CBC Sections 11B-703.3 and 11B-703.4.
1. Dimensions and Capitalization (CBC 11B-703.3.1): Braille dots shall have a domed or rounded shape and shall comply with CBC Table 11B-703.3.1. The indication of an uppercase letter or letters shall only be used before the first word of sentences, proper nouns and names, individual letters of the alphabet, initials, and acronyms.
Braille dot physical requirements shall be per CBC Table 11B-703.3.1 as indicated below; dimensions for distances are measured from center to center of Braille dots:
a. Dot Base Diameter: 0.059 inch minimum, 0.063 inch maximum. b. Distance between Two Dots in the same Cell: 0.100 inches. c. Distance between corresponding Dots in adjacent Cells: 0.300 inches. d. Dot Height: 0.025 inch minimum, 0.037 inch maximum.
e. Distance between corresponding Dots from one cell directly below: 0.395 inch minimum, 0.400 inch maximum.
2. Position (CBC 11B-703.3.2): Braille shall be positioned below the corresponding text in a horizontal format, flush left, or centered. If text is multi-lined, Braille shall be placed below the entire text. Braille shall be separated 3/8 inch minimum and 1/2 inch maximum from any other tactile characters and 3/8 inch minimum and from raised borders and decorative elements.
H. Sign Installation Height and Location, CBC 11B-703.4:
1. Height Above Ground or Floor: Tactile characters on signs shall be located 48 inches minimum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest Braille cells and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured form the baseline of the highest line of raised characters.
2. Location: Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with one active leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where a tactile sign is provided at double doors with two active leafs, the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the latch side of a single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a clear floor space of 18 inches minimum by 18 inches minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Where provided, signs identifying permanent rooms and spaces shall be located at the entrance to, and outside of the room or space. Where provided, signs identifying exits shall be located at the exit door when approached in the direction of egress travel.
I. Visual Characters, CBC 11B-703.5: Visual characters are considered to be intended for signage that is not accompanied by Braille. (The requirements of this Section do not apply to room identification signage).
1. Finish and Contrast: Characters and their background shall have a non-glare finish.
Characters shall contrast with their background with either light characters 397
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 5 of 10
on a dark background or dark characters on a light background. Requirement applies to all signs.
2. Case: Characters shall be upper case or lower case or a combination of both.
3. Style: Characters shall be conventional in style. Characters shall not be italic, oblique, script, highly decorative, or other unusual forms.
4. Character Proportions: Characters shall be selected from fonts where the width of the uppercase letter “O” is 60 percent minimum and 110 percent maximum of the height of the uppercase letter “I”.
5. Character Height: Minimum character height shall be based on the uppercase letter “I” and shall comply with CBC Table 11B-703.5.5 as follows:
a. Height of baseline of character from finish floor:
1) 40 inches minimum to less than or equal to 70 inches with a horizontal viewing distance of:
a) Less than 72 inches: Minimum character height to be 5/8 inch. b) 72 inches and Greater: Minimum character height to be 5/8 inch plus 1/8 inch for each foot of viewing distance beyond 72 inches. 2) Greater than 70 inches to less than or equal to 120 inches with a horizontal viewing distance of:
a) Less than 180 inches: Minimum character height to be 2 inches. b) 180 inches and Greater: Minimum character height to be 2 inches plus 1/8 inch for each foot of viewing distance beyond 180 inches.
3) Greater than 120 inches, with a horizontal viewing distance of:
a) Less than 21 feet: Minimum character height to be 3 inches. b) 21 feet and Greater: Minimum character height to be 3 inches plus 1/8 inch for each foot of viewing distance beyond 21 feet.
6. Height from Finish Floor or Ground: Visual characters shall be 40 inches minimum above the finish floor or ground measured to the baseline of the character.
7. Stroke Thickness: Stroke thickness of the uppercase letter “I” shall be 10 percent minimum and 20 percent maximum of the height of the character.
8. Character Spacing: Character spacing shall be measured between the two closest points of adjacent raised characters, excluding word spaces. Spaces between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height.
9. Line Spacing: Spacing between the baselines of separate lines of characters within a message shall be 135 percent minimum and 170 percent maximum of the raised character height.
10. Format: Text shall be in a horizontal format.
398
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 6 of 10
J. Pictograms, CBC 11B-703.6:
1. Pictogram Field: Pictograms shall have a field height of 6 inches minimum.
Characters and Braille shall not be located in the pictogram field.
2. Finish and Contrast: Pictograms and their field shall have a non-glare finish.
Pictograms shall contrast with their field with either a light pictogram on a dark field or a dark pictogram on a light field.
3. Text Descriptors: Pictograms shall have text descriptors located directly below the pictogram field. Text descriptors shall comply with CBC Sections 11B-703.2, 11B- 703.3, and 11B-703.4.
K. Symbols of Accessibility, CBC 11B-703.7:
1. Finish and Contrast: Symbols of accessibility and their background shall have a non-glare finish. Symbols of accessibility shall contrast with their background with either a light symbol on a dark background or a dark symbol on a light background.
2. Symbols:
a. International Symbol of Accessibility (ISA): ISA symbols shall comply with CBC Figure 11B-703.7.2.1. The symbol shall consist of a white figure on a blue background. The blue shall be Color No. 15090 in Federal Standard 595B.
b. International Symbol of Teletypewriter (TTY): The International Symbol of Teletypewriter (TTY) shall comply with CBC Figure 11B-703.7.2.2. c. Volume Control Telephones: Telephones with a volume control shall be identified with a pictogram complying with CBC Figure 11B-703.7.2.3. d. Assistive Listening Systems: Assistive listening systems shall be identified by the International Symbol of Access for Hearing loss complying with CBC Figure 11B-703.7.2.4.
e. Toilet and Bathing Facilities, Geometric Symbols: Doorways leading to toilet and bathing rooms shall be identified by a geometric symbol complying with CBC Section 11B-703.7.2.6. The symbol shall be mounted at 58 inches minimum and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor measured from the centerline of the symbol. Where a door is provided, the symbol shall be mounted within 1 inch of the vertical centerline of the door. 1) Men’s Toilet and Bathing Facilities: Men’s toilet and bathing facilities shall be identified by an equilateral triangle, 1/4 inch thick, with edges 12 inches long and a vertex pointing upward. The triangle symbol shall contrast with the door, either light on dark background or dark on a light background.
2) Women’s Toilet and Bathing Facilities: Women’s toilet and bathing facilities shall be identified by a circle, 1/4 inch thick and 12 inches in diameter. The circle symbol shall contrast with the door, either light on dark background or dark on a light background.
3) Unisex Toilet and Bathing Facilities: Unisex toilet and bathing facilities shall be identified by a circle, 1/4 inch thick and 12 inches in diameter with a 1/4 inch thick triangle with a vertex pointing upward superimposed on the circle and within the 12 inch diameter. The triangle symbol shall contrast with the circle symbol, either light on 399
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 7 of 10
dark background or dark on a light background, the circle symbol shall contrast with the door, either light on dark background or dark on a light background.
4) Edges and Corners: Edges of geometric symbols shall be rounded, chamfered, or eased. Corners of geometric symbols shall have a minimum radius of 1/8 inch.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers, Basis-of-Design Products: In other Articles where named manufacturer’s products are indicated, Drawings and Specifications are based on products manufactured by:
1. Best Sign Systems Inc.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or comparable products by one of the following:
1) ASI-Modulex, Inc.
2) Gemini Incorporated.
2.3 PANEL SIGNS
A. General: Provide smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner complying with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
B. Design Requirements: Panel signs shall comply with Part 2 Article “Regulatory Requirements for Signs.”
C. Scheduled Signs: Provide signs as indicated on Drawings and as scheduled in Part 3 Article “Sign Schedule.”
D. Interior Panel Signs: Basis of Design: Best Sign Systems, Inc., HC 300 Series signs complying with the following requirements:
1. Material: Best Sign Systems Inc., MP Plastic, phenolic-backed melamine plastic laminate faced sheet, 0.25-inch thick.
2. Edge Condition: Beveled.
3. Corner Condition: Rounded to radius of 1/2 inch.
4. Border: 3/8-inch wide.
5. Text Font: Standard Medium.
6. Text Height: As indicated on Drawings.
7. Mounting: Unframed, wall mounted.
8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, text and border shall contrast with background.
400
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 8 of 10
E. Exterior Panel Signs: Basis of Design: Best Sign Systems, Inc., HC 300 Series signs complying with the following requirements:
1. Material: Fiberglass Sheet, 0.25-inch thick.
2. Edge Condition: Beveled.
3. Corner Condition: Rounded to radius of 1/2 inch.
4. Border: 3/8-inch wide.
5. Text Font: Standard Medium
6. Text Height: As indicated on Drawings.
7. Mounting: Unframed, wall mounted.
8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, text and border shall contrast with background.
F. Sign Backs/Blanks: Provide matching sign blanks for signs mounted to transparent and/or semi-transparent glazed surfaces to conceal exposed sign backs.
1. Where sign backs/blanks are located within the interior of the building, signs shall be of the same material as other interior signs.
2. Where sign backs/blanks are located on the exterior of the building, signs shall be of the same material as other exterior signs.
3. Profile and size of sign backs/blanks shall match that of the sign backs that are to be concealed.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Mechanical Fasteners: Use tamper resistant fasteners fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.
B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less for adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 401
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 9 of 10
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install signs at locations required by regulatory requirements, as indicated on the Drawings, and per this Specification section.
B. Height: Install signs at heights indicated on Drawings and to comply with regulatory requirements indicated in Part 2 Article “Regulatory Requirements for Signs” of this specification Section.
1. Sign mounting height shall be consistent for the Project.
C. Location Relative to Door Openings: Install signs relative to door openings as indicated on Drawings and to comply with regulatory requirements indicated in Part 2 Article “Regulatory Requirements for Signs” of this specification Section.
1. Sign location relative to door openings shall be consistent for the Project.
D. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below:
1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces that cannot be drilled or screwed. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces.
Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured.
3. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.
4. Where panel signs are mounted on glass, provide matching plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
B. Clean per manufacturer’s recommendation prior to final inspection. 402
22-12479 – Ph 2 SIGNAGE 101400 - 10 of 10
3.4 SIGN SCHEDULE
A. Interior Room Identification Signs: Provide interior room identification signage adjacent to doors at locations indicated on the Drawings.
1. Text Content: Identify rooms by number and name unless otherwise indicated.
Room names and numbering shall comply with Owner’s instructions (not Architect’s referencing or numbering as indicated on the Drawings).
2. Text Height: As indicated on Drawings and in compliance with referenced CBC and ADA requirements.
3. Sign Size: As indicated on drawings.
B. Tactile Exit Signs: Provide tactile exit signs at locations indicated on Drawings, as required to comply with regulatory requirements, and as follows:
1. Exterior Doors: Each grade level exterior exit door from a room or space having an illuminated exit sign shall be identified by a tactile exit sign with the word “EXIT”.
2. Interior Rooms to Exits: Each exit door to a corridor, exit enclosure, or exit passageway, from a room having an illuminated exit sign shall be identified by a tactile exit sign with the words “EXIT ROUTE”.
C. Toilet Room Identification Signs: Signage shall consist of door mounted geometric symbols and wall mounted identification signs to comply with regulatory requirements and as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Exterior Room/Space Identification Signs: Provide exterior identification signage at exterior public access doors to each usable or occupied space of the building.
1. Text Content: Identify building areas by functional use. Text content shall comply with Owner’s instructions.
2. Text Height: As indicated on Drawings and in compliance with referenced CBC and ADA requirements.
3. Sign Size: As indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION
403
22-12479 - Ph 2 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 of 5 SECTION 102800
TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following:
1. Toilet room accessories as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Underlavatory guards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.
404
22-12479 - Ph 2 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 of 5
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.
C. Coordinate backing for mounting accessories with wall framing.
D. Coordinate electrical power supply for electric power operated accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Toilet room accessories and mounting heights of accessories to be used by persons with disabilities shall comply with accessibility requirements of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design and the California Building Code, Chapter 11B, “Accessibility to Public Buildings, Public Accommodations, Commercial Buildings, and Public Housing.” B. Installation: Where accessories are to be usable by persons with disabilities, comply with regulatory requirements including, but not limited to the following:
1. Where accessories are provided, at least one of each type shall be accessible.
2. Accessories shall be located on an accessible route.
3. The height above the floor to any operating mechanism or point of use shall not exceed 40-inches.
4. Accessories with their bottom edge more than 27 inches above the floor shall not project more than 4 inches from the wall.
5. Mirrors located above lavatories or counter tops shall be installed with the bottom edge of the reflecting surface 40 inches maximum above the floor, mirrors not located above lavatories or counter tops shall be installed with the bottom edge of the reflecting surface 35 inches maximum above the floor.
6. Toilet paper dispensers shall not be of a type that controls delivery or that does not allow for continuous paper flow.
7. Grab bars shall comply with CBC Section 11B-609. Grab bars and any wall surface adjacent to grab bars shall be free of sharp or abrasive elements and shall have rounded edges. The space around grab bars shall be as follows:
a. 1-1/2 inch between the grab bar and the wall.
b. 1-1/2 inch minimum between the grab bar and any projecting objects below and to the ends.
c. 12 inches minimum between the grab bar and any projecting objects above.
405
22-12479 - Ph 2 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 of 5
2.2 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet Room Accessories: Toilet room accessories shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Basis of Design: Named manufacturers' products indicated in the accessory schedule for each accessory type indicated are for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Named products are based on the following manufacturer:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
1) Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or equivalent products by one of the following:
a) American Specialties, Inc.
b) Bradley Corporation.
c) General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO)
B. Locks and Keys: Lockable accessories shall be provided with cylindrical locks and all locks shall be keyed alike. Provide each lockable accessory with not less than one key.
C. Finish: Exposed stainless steel surfaces of accessories shall have a satin finish unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Drawings and Specifications are based on the following:
a. Truebro, Inc., Lavguard2 series underlavatory guard. 1) Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
a) Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2. Description: Antimicrobial, white molded-plastic underlavatory guard assemblies.
Underlavatory guard assemblies shall cover waste piping and hot and cold water supply piping, allow service access without removing coverings, and shall prevent contact with hot surfaces and/or sharp objects.
3. Locations: Provide underlavatory guard assemblies at all lavatories and/or sinks in all toilet rooms, and at sinks in cabinets/counter tops that are indicated to be accessible to persons in a wheel chair.
406
22-12479 - Ph 2 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 of 5
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 with satin finish, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel).
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.
2. Confirm and coordinate mounting heights and locations of support backing for accessories that are to be accessible to persons with disabilities to insure installed accessories will comply with accessibility requirements when installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; commencement of work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 407
22-12479 - Ph 2 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5 of 5
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions and as indicated on Drawings. Use fasteners appropriate for substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
1. Accessories such as grab bars, towel bars, paper dispensers and soap dispensers, provided on or within walls, shall be installed and sealed to protect structural elements from moisture. Sealant shall not be visible in the finished installation. Sealant shall be mildew resistant silicone sealant as specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.”
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
408
409
22-12479 – Ph 2 EMERGENCY KEY CABINETS (KNOX BOX) 104116 - 1 of 2 SECTION 104116
EMERGENCY KEY CABINETS (KNOX BOX)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes emergency key cabinets (Knox Box).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product including installation instructions. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EMERGENCY KEY CABINETS
A. Emergency Key Cabinets, General: Emergency key cabinet for secure storage of keys for use by local police and fire departments. Emergency key cabinets shall be acceptable to local police and fire departments.
B. Basis of Design: Drawings and Specifications are based on the following:
1. Knox Company; 3200 Series Hinged Door Model Knox Box.
C. Emergency Key Cabinet Properties:
1. Mounting: Surface mounted.
2. Exterior Dimensions (Body): 4 inches high, by 5 inches wide, by 3-3/4 inches deep.
3. Lock: UL listed, double action rotating tumblers and hardened steel pins accessed by a biased cut key.
4. Body: 1/4 inch steel plate.
5. Door: 1/2 inch thick steel with interior gasket and stainless steel hinge.
6. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard proprietary finish, black in color.
7. Capacity: Holds up to 10 keys and access cards.
410
22-12479 – Ph 2 EMERGENCY KEY CABINETS (KNOX BOX) 104116 - 2 of 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls for suitable framing depth and blocking where emergency key cabinets will be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Location and Height: Install emergency key cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated, 6 ft high minimum mounting height unless restricted by local requirements; mounting locations and heights shall be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Installation: Install cabinets in accordance with cabinet manufacturer’s installation instructions appropriate for construction materials of project conditions. Installation shall be capable of resisting physical attack and preventing unwanted removal of cabinet.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by cabinet manufacturers.
E. Replace cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
411
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104415 - 1 of 3 SECTION 104415
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Surface mounted fire extinguisher cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
2. Portable hand carried fire extinguishers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.
B. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire extinguisher cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Fire Extinguishers: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10 when testing interval required by NFPA 10 is within the warranty period.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. 412
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104415 - 2 of 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers, fire-protection cabinets, and accessories, from a single source from a single manufacturer.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
3. Potter Roemer LLC.
2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers, General: Type, size, and capacity as indicated.
1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.
C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated, 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled- steel container.
2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet: Surface mounted cabinet with rolled edge of size suitable for fire extinguishers indicated, with one-piece combination trim and door frame with exposed trim face.
1. Basis of Design: Design Drawings and specifications are based on the following:
a. J.L. Industries; Ambassador Series surface mounted cabinet with rolled edge.
2. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
3. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard baked enamel finish, white.
4. Cabinet Size: Sized to accommodate a 10 lb capacity fire extinguisher.
5. Doors and Trim: Solid door with 2 x 4 inch view window and Saf-T-Lok, clear acrylic glazing.
6. Pull: Flush/Recessed pull.
413
22-12479 – Ph 2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104415 - 3 of 3 B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers, cabinets, and mounting brackets in locations indicated, and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Mounting Height: Mount surface mounted cabinets with the bottom of the cabinet 26-1/2 inches above the floor.
a. Surface mounted fire extinguisher cabinets projecting more than 4 inches from the wall shall be mounted with the bottom edge not more than 27 inches above the floor so as not to be considered a projecting element per CBC 11B-307.
2. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. Locate brackets so that the top of installed fire extinguishers will not exceed 48 inches above the finished floor.
C. Fire Extinguishers: Install fire extinguishers in cabinets.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
414
415
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 1 o f 10
SECTION 220000
GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. The preceding General Conditions shall form a pa rt of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated here. The provisions of this Section shall also apply to Division 22 of these Specifications and shall be considered a part of that Divisions.
1.2 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. All work and materials shall be in accordance wi th current rules and regulations of applicable codes. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Should the Drawings or Specifications call for material or methods of construction of a h igher quality or standard than required by these codes, the Drawings and Specifications shall govern. Applicable codes and regulations include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:
2019 California Building Code CCR Title 24, Part 2
2019 California Electrical Code CCR Title 24, Part 3
2019 California Mechanical Code CCR Title 24, Part 4
2019 California Plumbing Code CCR Title 24, Part 5
2019 California Energy Code CCR Title 24, Part 6
2019 California Fire Code CCR Title 24, Part 9
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Provide: The term "provide" as used in these sp ecifications or on the drawings shall mean furnish and install.
B. Piping: The term "piping" as used in these spec ifications or on the drawings shall mean all pipe, fittings, valves, hangers, insulatio n, etc. as may be required for a complete and functional system.
C. Ductwork: The terms "duct" or "ductwork" as use d in these specifications or on the drawings shall mean all ducts, fittings, joints, dampers, hangers, insulation, etc. as may be required for a complete and functional system.
D. Wiring: The term "wiring" as used in these spec ifications or on the drawings shall mean all wiring, conduit, boxes, connections, transformers, relays, switches etc. as may be required for a complete and functional system.
416
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 2 o f 10
1.4 PERMITS AND FEES
A. The Contractor shall take out all permits and ar range for all tests in connection with his work as required. All charges are to be included in the work.
1.5 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Examination: Before starting work, thoroughly e xamine existing and newly completed underlying and adjoining work and conditions on which the installation of this work depends. Report to the Engineer in wri ting all conditions which might adversely affect this work.
B. Layout: Layout of materials, equipment and syst ems is generally diagrammatic unless specifically dimensioned. Some work may be s hown offset for clarity. The actual locations of all materials, piping, ductwork , fixtures, equipment, supports, etc. shall be carefully planned prior to installation of any work in order to avoid all interference with each other, or with structural, e lectrical, architectural or other elements.
C. Verification: If discrepancies are discovered be tween drawing and specification requirements, the more stringent requirement shall apply. All conflicts shall be called to the attention of the Engineer prior to th e installation of any work or the ordering of any equipment. No work shall be prefabricated or installed prior to this coordination. No costs will be allowed to the Contr actor for any prefabrication or installation performed prior to this coordination. Verify the proper voltage and phase of all equipment with the electrical plans.
D. Location of Utilities Prior to Trenching or Eart hwork: The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of two business days prior to b eginning trenching or earthwork. Prior to this notification, the Contrac tor shall have marked all proposed trenches with paint and shall have contact ed a utility locating company and have had this company mark all found undergroun d utilities with paint. The Contractor shall then coordinate and arrange for a site visit with the Owner to review the proposed trenching and/or earthwork area s. Trenching and/or earthwork shall not begin until the Owner agrees. Repair and/or compensation for repair of marked utilities is the responsibilit y of the Contractor. The Owner retains the right to either self-perform the repair or require the Contractor to complete the repair, as directed by the Owner. If while performing the work, the Contractor discovers utilities that have not been m arked, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner verbally and in writing.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee shall be in accordance with the Genera l Conditions. The Contractor shall repair any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and pay for any resulting damage to other work which appears within the guarantee period. These Specifications may extend the period of the guarant ee for certain items. Where such extensions are called for, or where items are normally provided with 417
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 3 o f 10
guarantee periods in excess of that called for in t he General Conditions, the certificate of guarantee shall be furnished to the Owner through the Engineer.
1.7 QUIETNESS
A. Piping, ductwork and equipment shall be arranged and supported so that vibration is a minimum and is not transmitted to the structure.
1.8 DAMAGES BY LEAKS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages caused by leaks in the temporary or permanent piping systems prior to completion of work and during the period of the guarantee, and for damages caused by disconnected pipes or fittings, and the overflow of equipment prior to completion of the work.
1.9 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. The Contractor shall examine the site, compare i t with Plans and Specifications, and shall have satisfied himself as to the conditions under which the work is to be performed. No allowance shall subsequently be made in his behalf for any extra expense to which he may be put due to failure or neglect on his part to make such an examination.
1.10 COMPATIBILITY WITH EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Any work which is done as an addition, expansion or remodel of an existing system shall be compatible with that system.
1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be new unless othe rwise noted. Materials and equipment of a given type shall be by the same manu facturer. Materials and equipment shall be free of dents, scratches, marks, shipping tags and all defacing features at time of project acceptance. Materials and equipment shall be covered or otherwise protected during construction as required to maintain the material and equipment in new factory condition until project acceptance.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Within 30 days of contract award, the Contractor shall submit PDF copy of shop drawings for all materials, equipment, etc. proposed for use on this project. Material or equipment shall not be ordered or installed until written review is processed by the Engineer.
418
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 4 o f 10
All shop drawings must comply with the following:
1. Shop drawings are required for all material and equipment items and shall include manufacturer's name and catalog numbers, dimensions, capacities, performance curves, and all other characteristics and accessories as listed in the specifications or on the drawings. Descripti ve literature shall be current factory brochures and submittal sheets. Capacities shall be certified by the factory.
2. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time in a neat and orderly fashion in a single PDF format with title sheet inc luding Project, Engineer and Contractor, table of contents, and indexed tabs dividing each group of materials or item of equipment. All items shall be identified by the specification paragraph number for which they are proposed. All equipment shall also be identified by the mark number as indicated on drawings.
3. All capacities, characteristics, and accessories called for in the specifications or on the drawings shall be high-lighted, circled or underlined on the shop drawings. Calculations and other detailed data indicating how the item was selected shall be included for items t hat are not scheduled.
Data must be complete enough to permit detailed com parison of every significant characteristic which is specified, scheduled or detailed.
B. Substitutions: Manufacturers and model numbers l isted in the specifications or on the drawings represent the standard of quality and features desired. Proposed substitutions shall comply with the Owner’s General Requirements. Calculations and other detailed data indicating how the item was selected shall be included. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility that substituted items or procedures will meet the specifications and job requirements and shall be responsible for the cost of redesign and modifications to the work caused by these items. At the Engineer's request, furnish locations where equipment similar to the substituted equipment is installed and operating along with the user's phone numbers and contact person.
Satisfactory operation and service history will be considered in the acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution.
C. Review: Submittals will be reviewed for general conformance with the design concept, but this review does not guarantee quantity shown, nor does it supersede the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all materials, equipment and installation in accordance with the drawings and sp ecifications. The Contractor shall agree that shop drawing submittals processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders; that the purpose of shop drawing sub mittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. The Contrac tor shall agree that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawings and design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to o r after shop drawing submittals are processed by the Engineer, the design drawings and specifications shall 419
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 5 o f 10
control and shall be followed. If a resubmittal is required, submit a complete copy of the Engineer's review letter requiring such with the resubmittal.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
A. All material, equipment, devices, etc., shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the particular item. The Contractor shall be responsible for all installations contrary to th e manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall make all necessary changes and revisions to achieve such compliance. Manufacturer's installa tion instructions shall be delivered to and maintained at the job site through the construction of the project.
1.14 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. All work shall be scheduled subject to the revie w of the Engineer and the Owner.
No work shall interfere with the operation of the existing facilities on or adjacent to the site. The Contractor shall have at all times, a s conditions permit, a sufficient force of workmen and quantity of materials to insta ll the work contracted for as rapidly as possible consistent with good work, and shall cause no delay to other Contractors engaged upon this project or to the Own er. HVAC equipment and functions, whether existing or new, shall be mainta ined in operating condition whenever the facility is occupied, unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
1.15 DEMOLITION
A. Existing equipment, ducts, piping, etc. noted fo r removal shall be removed and delivered to the Owner at a location to be determined by the Owner. Those items determined by the Owner to be of no value shall bec ome the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the job site b y the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Existing piping, ducts, services, etc. requiring capping shall be capped below floors, behind walls, above ceiling s or above roof unless otherwise noted. Where items are removed, patch th e surfaces to match the existing surfaces.
1.16 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL REMOVAL
A. All hazardous material removal will be by the Ow ner. Hazardous material is to be removed before the work is started. If the Contractor discovers hazardous material which has not been removed, the Contractor shall immediately cease work in that area and promptly notify the Owner.
1.17 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The locations and dimensions for openings throug h walls, floors, ceilings, foundations, footings, etc. required to accomplish the work under this Specification Division shall be provided under this Division. Ex cept as noted below, the actual openings and the required cutting and patching shal l be provided by other Divisions. Coring through existing concrete or mas onry walls, floors, ceilings, 420
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 6 o f 10
foundations, footings, etc., and saw cutting of concrete floors or asphaltic concrete required to accomplish the work under this Specification Division shall be provided under this Division. Patching of these surfaces sh all be provided by other Divisions. Cutting or coring shall not impair the strength of the structure. Any damage resulting from this work shall be repaired a t the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.18 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. General: Barrel of pipe shall have uniform supp ort on sand bed. Sand shall be free from clay or organic material, suitable for the purpose intended and shall be of such size that 90 percent to 100 percent will pass a No. 4 sieve and not more than 5 percent will pass a No. 200 sieve. Unless otherwise noted, minimum earth cover above top of pipe or tubing outside building walls shall be 24”, not including base and paving in paved areas.
B. Excavation: Width of trench at top of pipe shal l be minimum of 16”, plus the outside diameter of the pipe. Provide all shoring required by site conditions.
Where over excavation occurs, provide compacted san d backfill to pipe bottom.
Where groundwater is encountered, remove to keep ex cavation dry, using well points and pumps as required.
C. Backfill:
1. 6” Below, Around, and to 12” Above Pipe: Materi al shall be sand. Place carefully around and on top of pipe, taking care no t to disturb piping, consolidate with vibrator.
2. One Foot Above Pipe to Grade: Material shall be sandy or silty loam, free of lumps, laid in 6” layers, uniformly mixed to pro per moisture and compacted to required density. If backfill is determined to be suitable and required compaction is demonstrated by laboratory test, water compaction in 6” layers may be used, subject to review by Engineer.
D. Compaction: Compact to density of 95% within bu ilding and under walkways, driveways, traffic areas, paved areas, etc. and to 90% elsewhere. Demonstrate proper compaction by testing at top, bottom and one -half of the trench depth.
Perform these tests at three locations per 100’ of trench.
1.19 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Existing services and systems shall be maintaine d except for short intervals when connections are made. The Contractor shall be resp onsible for interruptions of services and shall repair damage done to any existing service caused by the work.
If utilities not indicated on the drawings are unc overed during excavation, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately.
421
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 7 o f 10
1.20 PROTECTIVE COATING FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
A. All ferrous pipe below grade (except cast iron) shall have a factory applied protective coating of extruded high density polyeth ylene, 35 to 70 mils total thickness, X-Tru-Coat, Scotchkote. All fittings and areas of damaged coating shall be covered with two layer double wrap of 10 mil polyvinyl tape to total thickness of 40 mils. John-Mansville. Protective coating shall be extended 6” above surrounding grade.
1.21 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors as required where equipment , piping, valves, ductwork, etc. are not otherwise accessible. Access doors shall m atch the wall or ceiling finish and fire rating as indicated on the Architectural drawings. 16-gage steel frame and 14-gage steel door with paintable finish, except in ceramic tile, where door shall be 16-gage stainless steel with satin finish. Continu ous hinge. Deliver doors to the General Contractor for installation. Milcor. Unless otherwise noted, the minimum sizes shall be as follows:
1 valve up to 1-1/2” 12” x 12”
1 valve up to 3” 16” x 16”
1.22 CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Steel stud with expansion wedge requiring a dril led hole – powder driven anchors are not acceptable. Minimum spacing shall be 12 diameters center to center and 10 diameters center to edge of concrete. Maximum allowable stresses for tension and shear shall be 80% of the ICC Evaluation Servic e Report (ESR) values.
Minimum concrete embedment shall be the nominal embedment listed in the ESR table. Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ2.
1.23 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING AND OTHER SUPPORTS
A. Mechanical systems (equipment, ductwork, piping, conduit, etc.) shall be anchored in accordance with the CBC. All systems mounted on concrete shall be secured with a concrete anchor at each mounting point. All air handlers shall be mounted on spring isolators. Secure base plate as indicate d above. Attachment of equipment, ductwork, piping, conduit, etc. supported on curbs or platforms shall be made to the side of curbs and platforms, where poss ible. Where screws or lag bolts must be installed through the top of a sheet metal cap, the installation shall be as follows. Pre-drill pilot hole. Fill pilot h ole with polyurethane sealant. Install screw or lag bolt with a flat washer and an EPDM wa sher adjacent to the sheet metal.
422
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 8 o f 10
1.24 SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Any structural element required to hang or suppo rt piping, ducts or equipment provided under this Division and not shown on other drawings shall be provided under this Division.
B. Mechanical systems (equipment, ductwork, piping, etc.) shall be provided with supports and seismic restraints in accordance with the CBC. Submit anchorage calculations and details stamped and signed by a structural engineer registered in the State of California. Submit shop drawings showing location, type and detail of restraints. Submit manufacturer’s data for restrai nts. Restraint system shall be Mason West, Inc. (OSHPD OPM 0043-13).
1.25 PAINTING
A. Paint all black iron supports, hangers, anchors , etc. with two coats of rust resisting primer. Also paint all uninsulated black iron pipin g exposed to weather with two coats of rust resisting primer.
1.26 ROOF PENETRATIONS AND PATCHING
A. Whenever any part of the mechanical systems pene trates the roof or exterior wall, the openings shall be flashed and counter-flashed w ater tight with minimum 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Flashing shall exten d not less than eight inches from the duct, pipe, or supporting member in all di rections unless detailed otherwise. All roof penetrations and patching shal l be in accordance with the recommendations of the National Roofing Contractor' s Association and the Owner’s roofing standards.
1.27 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Above Grade Piping: Provide markers on piping wh ich is either exposed or concealed in accessible spaces. For piping systems, other than drain and vent lines, indicate the fluid conveyed or its abbreviation, either by pre-printed markers or stenciled marking, and include arrows to show di rection of flow. Pre-printed markers shall be the type that wrap completely around the pipe, requiring no other means of fastening such as tape, adhesive, etc. Com ply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. Locate markers at ends of lines, near major branches and other interruptions including equipment in the line, where lines pass through floors, walls or ceilings or otherwise pass into inaccessible spa ces, and at 50' maximum intervals along exposed portions of lines. Marking of short branches and repetitive branches for equipment connections is not required.
B. Below Grade Piping: Bury a continuous, pre-prin ted, bright-colored, metallic ribbon marker capable of being located with a metal detector with each underground pipe.
Locate directly over buried pipe, 6” to 8” below finished grade.
423
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 9 o f 10
C. Equipment: All equipment shall be identified wit h a plastic laminated, engraved nameplate which bears the unit mark number as indic ated on the drawings (e.g.
AC-4). Provide 1/2" high lettering - white on black background. Nameplates shall be permanently secured to the exterior of the unit.
D. Valves: Provide brass valve tags with brass hoo ks or chains on all valves of each piping system, excluding check valves, valves within equipment, faucets, stops and shut-off valves at fixtures and other repetitive terminal units. Prepare and submit a tagged-valve schedule, listing each valve by tag nu mber, location and piping service. Deliver to Owner through the Engineer.
1.28 CLEANING
A. Progressively and at completion of the job, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all of his work, removing all debris, stain and marks r esulting from his work. This includes but is not limited to building surfaces, p iping, equipment and ductwork, inside and out. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, grease, labels, tags, tape, rust, and all foreign material.
1.29 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Printed: Three copies of Operation and Maintenan ce Instructions and Wiring Diagrams for all equipment and parts list for all f aucets, trim, valves, etc. shall be submitted to the Engineer. All instructions shall b e clearly identified by marking them with the same designation as the equipment ite m to which they apply (e.g.
AC-3). All Wiring Diagrams shall agree with reviewed Shop Drawings and indicate the exact field installation. All instructions shall be submitted at the same time and shall be bound in a suitable binder with tabs dividing each type of equipment (e.g.
Pumps, Fans, Motors, etc.). Each binder shall be labeled indicating "Operating and Maintenance Instructions, Project Title, Contractor, Date" and shall have a Table of Contents listing all items included.
B. Verbal: The Contractor shall verbally instruct t he Owner's maintenance staff in the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. The controls contractor shall present that portion of the instructions that apply to the control system. The Engineer's office shall be notified 48 hours prior to this meeting.
C. Acknowledgment: The Contractor shall prepare a l etter indicating that all operation and maintenance instructions (printed and verbal) have been given to the Owner, to the Owner's satisfaction. This letter shall be a cknowledged (signed) by the Owner and submitted to the Engineer.
1.30 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall obtain one set of prints fo r the project, upon which a record of all construction changes shall be made. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall maintain a record of all deviations in the wo rk from that indicated on the drawings. Final location of all underground work sh all be recorded by depth from 424
22-12479 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 220000 - 10 of 10
finished grade and by offset distance from permanen t surface structures, i.e. building, curbs, walks. In addition, the water, gas , sewer, under floor duct, etc. within the building shall be recorded by offset dis tances from building walls. An electronic copy of the original drawings will be ma de available to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall transfer the changes, notation s, etc. from the marked-up prints to the electronic copy. The record drawings (marked-up prints, electronic drawings disc and a hard copy) shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
1.31 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. The Contractor shall perform, document and subm it all acceptance testing as required by California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6.
END OF SECTION
425
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 1 of 12
SECTION 220050
PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specificati on Sections, apply to this Division.
1.2 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
A. The preceding General Mechanical Provisions shal l form a part of this Division with the same force and effect as though repeated here.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Included: Provide all labor, materials and servi ces necessary for complete, lawful and operating systems as shown or noted on the draw ings or as specified here.
The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Sanitary sewer system.
2. Domestic water system.
3. Fuel gas system.
4. Drain system (including condensate drain).
5. All equipment as shown or noted on the drawings or as specified.
1.4 RELEVANT CODE SECTIONS
A. 2019 California Building Code
1. CBC Section 11B-213.2
2. CBC Section 11B-213.3
3. CBC Section 11B-216.8
4. CBC Section 11B-703.7.2.6.3
5. CBC Section 11B-703
6. CBC Division 11B-6
7. CBC Section 11B-604.3.1
8. CBC Sections 11B-602 through 11B-612
9. CBC Section 11B-604.6
10. CBC Section 11B-604.9.5
11. CBC Section 11B-605.4
12. CBC Section 11B-606.4
13. CBC Section 11B-607.5
14. CBC Section 11B-608.5
426
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 2 of 12
15. CBC Section 11B-611.3
16. CBC Section 11B-306
17. CBC Section 11B-606.3
18. CBC Section 11B-606.7
19. CBC Section 11B-606.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Sanitary Sewer:
a. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: Inside Building and Within Five Feet of Building Walls: Standard weight coated cast iron pi pe and fittings, CISPI 301, or hub end with rubber gaskets, ASTM A74 , ASTM C564. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be mark ed with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Ins titute as manufactured by Tyler, AB&I or Charlotte. Heavy-d uty shielded couplings, Type 304 stainless steel, with neoprene gasket, ASTM C1540. Husky HD 2000, Clamp-All 80. Mission HeavyWe ight MG Couplings are also acceptable. Size 2" and smaller above grade may be standard weight galvanized steel, ASTM A120/ A53, with coated cast iron recessed drainage fittings, ANSI B 16.12. 2" and smaller exposed to view shall be galvanized steel, ASTM A120/A53, with coated cast iron recessed drainage f ittings, ANSI B16.12. Fixture and equipment drains exposed to view in kitchens shall be DWV copper, recessed drainage fittings, 95-5 solder.
1. Cleanouts: Comparable models of Josam, Wade or Z urn are acceptable.
Floor Cleanouts: Smith 4028 with nickel bronze top in finished areas; Smith 4228 in utility areas. Wall Cleanouts: Smith 4532 with stainless steel cover and screw. Pipe Cleanouts: Iron body with threaded brass plug.
2. Cleanout Box: Precast reinforced concrete. Cast iron lid marked for service.
Christy F22 in foot traffic areas; G5 in roadways.
B. Water and Gas:
1. Cold Water Piping:
a. Inside Building, Within Five Feet of Building Wa lls, and All Above Grade:
1) Hard temper seamless copper, ASTM B88. Wrought c opper fittings, ANSI B16.22. Type L with brazed joints (1 100F, min.). 1-1/2" and smaller above grade may be soldered, 95- 5 tin-antimony solder. All nipples shall be red bra ss (85% 427
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 3 of 12
copper). Above grade fittings may be copper (1/2” to 2”) or bronze (2-1/2” to 4”) press fittings, ASME B16.18 o r ASME B16.22. EPDM O-rings. Installation shall be in acco rdance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Nibco, ProPress .
2. Hot Water Piping:
a. Inside Building - Above Slab: Same as Cold Water Piping - Inside Building.
3. Gas Piping:
a. Inside Building and All Above Grade: 2" and Smal ler: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A120/A53. 150 psi galva nized malleable iron screwed fittings, ANSI B16.3, ANSI B 31.8. Flexible connections shall be convoluted yellow brass with d ielectric couplings, AGA approved.
2-1/2" and larger: Schedule 40 black steel
pipe, ASTM A120/A53. Standard weight carbon steel w elding fittings, long radius ells, ANSI B16.9.
b. Inside Building - Below Grade to Five Feet Outsi de Building:
Same as Inside Building and All Above Grade. Provid e sleeves and vents acceptable to administrative authority.
4. Valves and Specialties:
a. Valves:
1) General: Manufacturer's model numbers are listed to complete description. Equivalent models of Crane, Grinnell, Milwaukee, Nibco, Stockham or Walworth are acceptab le.
All valves of a particular type or for a particular service shall be by the same manufacturer. Butterfly valves may b e
substituted for 2-1/2" and larger gate valves above grade; see specification below. Use full port ball valve f or 2” and smaller water shutoff valves; see specification below.
2) Gate Valve: 2" and Smaller: All bronze. Rising s tem. Union bonnet. Wedge disk. Malleable iron handwheel. 200 p si
WOG. Stockham B-105. 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body,
bronze mounted. Non-rising stem. Wedge disk. 200 ps i
WOG. Flanged or AWWA hub end as applicable. Stockham
G-612. Underground valves shall have square operati ng
nut. Provide one operating "T" handle for undergrou nd
valves.
428
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 4 of 12
3) Check Valve: 2" and Smaller: All bronze swing ch eck, regrinding. 200 psi WOG. Stockham B-319.
4) Ball Valve: Full port. Bronze body, cap, stem, d isk and ball.
Screwed connection. Lever handle. TFE seat. O-ring seals. 300 psi WOG. Apollo, Grinnell, Jomar.
5) Plug Valve: Valves in gas piping systems must be UL listed for gas distribution. 4" and Smaller: Eccentric bro nze or nickel plated semi-steel plug. Semi-steel body. Bro nze bushings. Buna-N-rings. 175 psi WOG. DeZurik Series 400. 1-1/2" and smaller natural gas valves may be full p ort ball valves. Apollo, Jomar, Grinnell.
c. Miscellaneous Specialties:
1) Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rate d fully automatic, reseating combination temperature and pressure relief valve sized in accordance with energy input. Sensing element immersed within upper 6" of tank. Watts.
2) Union: 2" and Smaller: AAR malleable iron, bronz e to iron ground seat. 300 psi. Grinnell. Size 2-1/2" and Lar ger:
Grooved pipe, synthetic gasket, malleable iron hous ing.
Victaulic Style 77, Type "E" gasket, Grinnell.
3) Dielectric Coupling: Insulating union or flange rated for 250 psig. EPCO.
4) Shock Absorber: Multiple bellows. Seamless coppe r
chamber approved for concealed installations. Desig ned and applied in accordance with PDI WH201. Sioux Chi ef, Watts.
C. Drain Piping (including Condensate): Copper Type L as specified above for inside building cold water piping.
D. Miscellaneous Piping Items:
1. Pipe Support:
a. Pipe Hanger: Steel "J" hanger with side bolt for piping 4" and smaller; steel clevis hanger for piping 5" and larg er. Load and jam nuts. Size and maximum load per manufacturer's recommendation.
Felt liner for copper piping. Hanger and rod shall have galvanized finish. B-Line, Grinnell, Unistrut.
429
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 5 of 12
b. Isolating Shield: Galvanized steel shell and rei nforcing ribs. 1/4" non-conducting hair felt pad. Pipe hanger in accord ance with paragraph above. Increase hanger size per manufactu rer's recommendation. B-Line, Semco, Superstrut.
c. Construction Channel: 12-gage, 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" g alvanized steel channel. Single or multiple section. Self-locking n uts and fittings.
B-Line, Grinnell, Unistrut.
2. Flashing: Vent flashing shall be 4 lb/ft2 lead, 16" sq. flange, length sufficient to be turned down 2" into vent. Oatey. Flashing for other piping through roof shall be prefabricated galvanized steel roof j acks with 16" sq. flange.
Provide clamp-on storm collar and seal water tight with mastic. For cold process built-up roof, material shall be 4 lb/ft 2 lead instead of galvanized steel.
2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS
A. General: All piping insulation materials shall h ave fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested under ASTM E-84 and UL 723 not exceeding a f lame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.
B. Pre-Molded Fiberglass: Heavy density sectional p re-molded fiberglass with vapor barrier laminated all service jacket and pressure sealing vapor barrier lap. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.25 Btu-in/hr-ft2-F at a mean temperature of 50F.
Perm rating 0.02, ASTM E96. Puncture rating 50 Beac h units, ASTM D781.
Provide 3" (min.) wide tape of same material as lap for butt joints. For hot water piping, thickness shall be 1" for pipe sizes 3/4" a nd less; 1-1/2" thickness for pipe sizes 1" and larger. Certainteed, Knauf, Johns-Manville, Owens-Corning.
C. Fiberglass Blanket: Unfaced. Thermal conductivit y shall not exceed 0.25 Btu-in/hr-ft2-F at a mean temperature of 50F. 1-1/2 " thickness. Knauf, Johns- Manville, Owens-Corning.
D. PVC Jacket (for pipe, fittings and valves): Pre- molded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jackets, 0.020" thickness. Size to match application. Provide solvent weld adhesive and PVC vapor barrier pressure sealing tape by same manufacturer. Zeston.
E. Stretchable Glass Fabric: Reinforcing mesh. 10 X 20 continuous filament glass yarns per inch. Johns-Manville.
F. Vapor Barrier Coating: Childers CP-30, Foster 30 -25.
G. Lagging Adhesive: Childers CP-50A, Foster 30-36.
H. Outdoor Mastic: Childers CP-21, Foster 65-05.
430
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 6 of 12
I. Insulating Tape: Ground virgin cork and syntheti c elastomeric. Black, odorless, and non-toxic. K factor 0.43 Btu-in/hr-ft2-F or less. N on-shrinking. For outdoor use, provide protective finish by same manufacturer. Halstead.
J. Molded Closed Cell Vinyl (Piping Insulation Unde r Disabled Accessible Lavatories and Sinks): Fully molded closed cell vinyl, 3/16" t hick. Internal ribs on drain insulation to provide air gap. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 1.17 BTU-in/hr- ft 2-°F at an average temperature of 73°F. Weep hole in cleanout nut enclosure. Out of sight nylon fastening system. Hinged cap over va lve to allow access for servicing. Truebro Lav-guard.
2.3 FIXTURES
A. General: Provide rough-in for and install all pl umbing fixtures shown on drawings.
Except in equipment rooms, all trim, valves and pip ing not concealed in wall structure, above ceiling or below floors, shall be brass with polished chrome plate finish, unless noted otherwise. All enameled fixtur es shall be acid resisting.
Standard color is white unless otherwise noted.
B. Schedule: Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings for list of fixtures and trim. Manufacturer's model numbers are listed t o complete description.
Equivalent models of American Standard, Eljer, Elkay, Haws, Kohler or T&S Brass are acceptable. For drainage fixtures, equivalent models of Josam, Smith or Zurn are acceptable.
C. Stops and P-Traps: All fixtures shall be provide d with stops and P-Traps as applicable. Wall mounted faucets, valves, etc. shal l have integral stops or wall mounted stops.
1. Stops: All hot and cold water supplies shall be 1/2" I.P.S. inlet angle stops with stuffing box, loose key lock shield, and brass riser (3/8" for 2-1/2 gpm and less, otherwise 1/2"). McGuire, Speedway.
2. P-Traps: Semi-cast brass, ground joint. 17-gage. Clean-out plug.
Unobstructed waterway. California Tubular, McGuire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Piping Layout: Piping shall be concealed in wall s, above the ceilings, or below grade unless otherwise noted. Exposed piping shall run parallel to room surfaces; location to be approved by the Engin eer. No structural member shall be weakened by cutting, notching, bori ng or otherwise, unless specifically allowed by structural drawings and/or specifications. 431
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 7 of 12
Where such cutting is required, reinforcement shall be provided as specified or detailed. All piping shall be installe d in a manner to ensure unrestricted flow, eliminate air pockets, prevent a ny unusual noise, and permit complete drainage of the system. All piping shall be installed to permit expansion and contraction without strain on piping or equipment.
Vertical lines shall be installed to allow for buil ding settlement without damage to piping. Pipe sizes indicated on the drawi ngs are nominal sizes unless otherwise noted. Provide secondary drain piping where required.
2. Joints:
a. Threaded: Pipe shall be cut square and reamed to full size.
Threads shall be in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Joint compound or tape suitable for conveyed fluid shall be applied to male thread only.
Joints shall be made with three threads exposed.
b. Welded or Brazed: Filler rod shall be of suitabl e or the same alloy as pipe. Brazing filler metal shall have a minimum melting point of 1100F. Welding or brazing shall be performed by a Certified Welder or Brazer as certified by an organization/instituti on that uses standards recognized by the American Welding Society (AWS) and meets the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Press ure Vessels Code, Section 9.
c. Open Ends: Open ends of piping shall be capped d uring progress of work to preclude foreign matter.
d. Electrical Equipment: Piping shall not be run ov er electrical panels, motor control centers or switchboards.
3. Fittings and Valves:
a. Standard Fittings: All joints and changes in dir ection shall be made with standard fittings. Close nipples shall not be used. b. Reducers: Pipe size reduction shall be made with bell reducer fittings. Bushings shall not be used.
c. Unions: A union shall be installed on the leavin g side of each valve, at all sides of automatic valves, at equipment conn ections, and elsewhere as necessary for assembly or disassembly of piping.
d. Valves: All valves shall be full line size. Prov ide shut-off valve for each building and each equipment connection. Provid e shut-off valve at each point of connection to existing pipin g. At equipment connections, valves shall be full size of upstream piping, except that gas valves within 18" of the point of connection to the equipment may be the same size as the equipment connection.
432
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 8 of 12
e. Valve Accessibility: All valves shall be located so that they are easily accessible. Valves located above ceilings sh all be installed within 24" of the ceiling. Refer to specification 2 00000 for access requirements.
4. Pipe Support:
a. General: Hangers shall be placed to support pipi ng without strain on joints or fittings. Maximum spacing between supports shall be as specified below. Actual spacing requirements will d epend on structural system. Side beam clamps shall be provid ed with retaining straps to secure the clamp to the opposit e side of the beam. Vertical piping shall be supported with riser clamp at 20' on center (maximum). Support pipe within 12" of all ch anges in direction. Support individual pipes with pipe hanger. Copper piping systems which protrude through a surface for connection to a fixture stop or other outlet shall be secured with a drop e ll, Grinnell No. 9788; nipple through surface shall be threaded brass.
1) Pressure Pipe:
Maximum Spacing*
Pipe Size (Inches) Between Supports (ft .)
Copper Sch. 40 Plastic
steel
1/2 6 6 4
3/4 6 8 4
1 6 8 4
1-1/4 6 10 4
1-1/2 6 10 4
2 10 10 4
2-1/2 10 10 4
3 10 10 4
4 10 10 4
*Based on straight lengths of pipe with coupling s only. Provide additional supports for equipment, valves or other fittings. Plastic piping shall be supported per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Seismic requirements may reduce maximum spacing.
2) Gravity Drain Pipe: Piping shall be supported at each length of pipe or fitting, but in no case at greater spaci ng than indicated above for pressure pipe.
b. Hot and Cold Water Piping: All hot and cold wate r piping shall have isolating shield; no portion of this piping shall t ouch the structure without an isolating shield except at anchor points for fixture rough-in.
433
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 9 of 12
c. Trapeze: Trapeze hangers of construction channel and pipe clamps may be used. Submit design to Engineer for review.
5. Miscellaneous:
a. Escutcheons: Provide chrome plated metal escutch eons where piping penetrates walls, ceilings, or floors in finished areas.
b. Pipe Sleeves: All piping passing through concret e shall be provided with pipe sleeves. Allow 1" annular clearance betwe en sleeve and pipe for piping 3" and smaller, otherwise 2" annula r clearance.
Piping through walls below grade shall be sealed with Link-Seal.
c. Pipes Passing through Fire Rated Surfaces: Pipes passing through fire rated walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc . shall have the annular space surrounding the pipe or pipe insulati on sealed with fire rated materials in accordance with the require ments of the fire authority having jurisdiction.
d. Dielectric Couplings: Dielectric couplings shall be installed wherever piping of dissimilar metals are joined, except that bronze valves may be installed in ferrous piping without dielectric couplings.
e. Exposed Pipe at Fixtures: Piping extending from finished surfaces into a finished room shall be chrome plated brass, except under kitchen sinks in commercial kitchens.
B. Sanitary Sewer Piping:
1. General: Where inverts are not indicated, sanita ry sewer piping shall be installed at 1/4" per foot pitch. Piping 4" and larger may be installed at 1/8" per foot pitch where structural or other limitation s prevent installation at a greater pitch. Bell and spigot piping shall be inst alled with barrel on sand bed; excavate hole for bell.
2. Cleanouts: Install cleanouts at ends of lines, a t changes of direction greater than 45 degrees, and at not greater than 100 foot intervals. Locate interior cleanouts in accessible locations and bring flush to finished surface.
3. Vents: Vents shall terminate not less than 6" ab ove the roof nor less than 24" from any vertical surface nor within 10' of any outside air intake. Install horizontal vent lines at 1/4" per foot pitch. Offse t vents 2' minimum from gutters, parapets, ridges and roof flashing.
C. Water Piping: Connections to branches and risers shall be made from top of main.
Supply header in fixture battery shall be full size to last fixture, reducing in size only on individual connections to each fixture in batter y. Minimum pipe size shall be 3/4", unless otherwise noted. Exposed fixture stops and flush valves shall be installed with brass nipples for copper piping and galvanized nipples for galvanized 434
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 10 of 12
piping. Nipples are to extend from outside of wall to fitting at header or drop behind finish wall surfaces. Pipe nipples shall be same size as stop or flush valve. Provide shut off for each building and each connection to e quipment. Shock absorbers shall be installed in a vertical position per manufacturer’s instructions and per PDI- WH 201 where flush valves, metering faucets or othe r fast acting valves are connected to the domestic piping system.
D. Gas Piping: Installation shall comply with CPC a nd NFPA 54 (National Fuel Gas Code). Shall be pitched to drain to dirt legs at lo w points. No unions shall be installed except at connections to equipment. Provide shutoff and dirt leg at each equipment connection. Only equipment mounted on vib ration isolators shall be connected with flexible connectors. Under floor piping shall be sleeved and vented.
Underground Polyethylene pipe and butt fusion fitti ngs shall be joined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Met al to plastic transition fittings shall be installed at all transitions. Pro vide 14-gage insulated tracer wire secured to pipe at 10' intervals with nylon ties. Terminate tracer 6" above grade at both ends.
E. Drain Piping (Including Condensate): Install wit h constant pitch to receptacle, 1/4" per foot where possible, otherwise 1/8" per foot mi nimum. Provide TEE with clean-out plug at all changes of direction. Provide trap at each air handling unit to prevent air leakage. Only equipment mounted on vibr ation isolators shall be connected with flexible connection. Piping not conc ealed in wall structure, above ceilings or below floors shall be chrome plated brass.
F. PVC Piping: Shall be cut square and assembled pr ior to solvent weld. Apply primer per manufacturer's recommendations. Coat male joint fully with solvent, make joint before solvent dries and wipe exterior clean.
3.2 PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION:
A. Domestic Hot Water:
1. General: All domestic hot water piping, fittings and accessories shall be insulated.
2. Pipe: Apply pre-molded fiberglass sections to pi pe using integral pressure sealing lap adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Stagger longitudinal joints. Seal butt joints with factory supplied pressure sealing tape.
3. Fittings and Valves:
a. Wrap all fittings and valves with pre-cut fiberg lass blanket to thickness matching adjoining insulation. Cover blan ket with PVC jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommenda tions.
Solvent weld. Seal all joints with factory supplied pressure sealing vapor barrier tape with 1-1/2" (min.) overlap on bo th sides of joint.
Insulate valves to stem. Do not insulate unions, fl anges or valves 435
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 11 of 12
unless water temperature exceeds 140ºF or the pipin g is exposed to weather.
b. For miscellaneous fittings and accessories for w hich PVC jackets are not available or where proximity of fittings pr ecludes a neat-appearing installation, the Contractor may cover the fiberglass blanket with stretchable glass fabric, one coat of lagging adhesive and a final coat of vapor barrier coating. All expo sed ends of insulation shall be adequately sealed.
4. Additional Finish for Exposed Piping and Equipme nt: All piping and equipment exposed to view but protected from the we ather shall be given an additional finish of PVC jackets.
B. Cold Water Piping-Freeze Protection: All cold wa ter piping exposed to weather shall be wrapped with insulating tape, 50% overlap. Cover valves to stem. Apply at least two coats of protective finish.
C. Piping Insulation Under Disabled Accessible Lava tories and Sinks: Hot and cold water piping, hot and cold water stop and drain pip ing under disabled accessible lavatories and sinks shall be insulated with 3/16" thick molded closed cell vinyl to prevent accidental injury due to contact or temperature extremes. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under disabled accessible lavatories and sinks.
3.3 FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. Fixture Height: Shall be as indicated on Archite ctural drawings.
B. Floor Drains or Floor Sinks: Shall be placed par allel to room surfaces, set level, flush with floor, and adjusted to proper height to drain. Cover openings during construction to keep all foreign matter out of drain line.
C. Wall Hung Fixtures: Shall be provided with prope r backing and hanger plates secured to wall. Lavatories shall be supported with concealed arm supports.
Fixtures mounted on carriers shall bear against sto p nuts, clear of wall surface.
Caulk fixtures against walls with white G.E. "Sanit ary 1700" silicone sealant.
Caulking shall be smooth and flush with fixture surface (not concave).
D. Floor Mounted Fixtures: Shall be provided with p roper support plates. Grout at the floor with waterproof ceramic tile grout.
E. Other Connections: Rough-in and connection for t rim or fixtures supplied by others shall be included in this specification section.
436
22-12479 PLUMBING 220050 - 12 of 12
3.4 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. General: Unless otherwise directed, tests shall be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer. Work to be concealed shall not be enclosed until prescribed tests are made. Should any work be enclosed before such tests, the Contractor shall, at his expense, uncover, test and repair all work to original conditions. Leaks and defects shown by tests shall be repaired and entire work re tested. Tests may be made in sections, however, all connections between sections previously tested and new section shall be included in the new test.
B. Gravity Systems:
1. Sanitary Sewer: All ends of the sanitary sewer s ystem shall be capped and lines filled with water to the top of the highest v ent, 10' above grade minimum. This test shall be made before any fixture s are installed. Test shall be maintained until all joints have been inspected, but no less than 2 hours.
2. Storm Drain (Including Rainwater leader): Simila r to Sanitary Sewer.
3. Drains (Including Condensate): Similar to Sanita ry Sewer.
C. Pressure Systems:
1. General: There shall be no drop in pressure duri ng test except that due to ambient temperature changes. All components of system not rated for test pressure shall be isolated from system before test is made.
2. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping: Maintain 100 psig water pressure for 4 hours.
3. Gas Piping: Maintain 100 psig air pressure for 4 hours.
3.6 DISINFECTION
A. Disinfect all domestic water piping systems in a ccordance with AWWA Standard C651, "AWWA Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains", and in accordance with administrative authority. Disinfection process shal l be performed in cooperation with health department having jurisdiction and witnessed by a representative of the Engineer. During procedure signs shall be posted at each water outlet stating, "Chlorination - Do Not Drink". After disinfection, water samples shall be collected for bacteriological analysis. Certificate of Bacter iological Purity shall be obtained and delivered to the Owner through the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
437
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 1 of 15
SECTION 230100
GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section covers and applies to all work incl uded in Divisions 22 through 23.
B. Work in this Section includes providing labor, m aterials, equipment, services necessary, fabrication, installation and testing for fully operational and safe systems including all necessary materials, appurtenances and features whether specified or shown in the contract documents or not, in conformity with all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction for the following:
1. Mechanical work covered by all sections within D ivisions 22 and 23 of the specifications, including, but not limited to:
a. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning system s and equipment. b. Plumbing systems and equipment.
c. Control systems.
d. Testing and balancing.
C. Provide cutting and patching, for the Mechanical Work.
D. Provide piping from plumbing terminations, 10 fe et from equipment, for water, gas, sanitary sewer and waste.
E. Provide drain piping for all equipment requiring drainage to floor drains, roof, sink, or funnel drains.
1.3 RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Carefully check the documents of each section wi th those of other sections and Divisions. Ascertain the requirements of any interfacing materials or equipment being furnished and/or installed by those sections and Divisions, and provide the proper installation and/or required interface.
438
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 2 of 15
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supply all equipment and accessories in complian ce with the applicable standards listed in article 1.6 of this section and with all applicable national, state and local codes.
B. All items of a given type shall be the products of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise specified herein.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples and certificates of compliance required by Division 01.
B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturers st andard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, accessories and other data. Supplement manufacturers standard data to provide information specific to this project.
C. Organize submittals in sequence according to Spe cification Section. Submit in single electronic PDF document with tabs identifying each Specification Section.
Provide Table of Contents identifying the Specification Sections being submitted and the contents within each tabbed section. Prepare Submittals in multiple volumes if required. Provide a complete Submittal package by Division at one time. Do not submit individual Sections piecemeal.
D. In addition to the submittal requirements of Div isions 22 and 23, submit product data for the following items per the provisions Division 01:
1. All Equipment and Fixtures indicated in Schedule s on Drawings.
2. Access panels
E. If more than two submissions are required (initi al submittal and one resubmittal) based on rejection or lack of compliance by submittal, then the Contractor shall:
1. Arrange for additional reviews by the Design Eng ineers.
2. Pay all costs for such additional reviews.
F. Corrections or comments made on the shop drawing s during review do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. Shop drawing checking by the Engineer is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for:
439
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 3 of 15
1. Confirming and correlating all quantities and di mensions.
2. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques o f construction.
3. Coordinating his work with that of all other tra des.
4. Performing his work in a safe and satisfactory m anner.
G. Substitutions:
1. Prior to Bid shall be in accordance with Divisio n 01.
2. After award of contract, submit separate substit ution request for each substitution in accordance with the requirements hereinbelow. Support each request with:
a. Complete data substantiating compliance of propo sed substitution with requirements stated in Contract documents.
b. Data relating to changes in construction schedul e.
c. Any effect of substitution on other Work in this and other Divisions, and any other related contracts, and changes required in other work or products.
3. Contractor shall be responsible at no extra cost to Owner for any changes resulting from proposed substitutions which affect work of other Sections or Divisions, or related contracts.
4. Claims for additional costs caused by substituti on that may subsequently become apparent shall be met by the Contractor.
5. Failure by the Contractor to order materials or equipment in a timely manner will not constitute justification for a substitution.
6. Substitutions will not be considered for accepta nce when acceptance will require revision of Contract Documents, unless Contractor bears cost of redesign.
a. Arrange for required redesign by Engineer.
b. Pay all costs for such redesign.
c. All subject to Architect's approval.
7. Approval of substitutions shall not relieve Cont ractor from full compliance with requirements of Contract documents.
440
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 4 of 15
H. As-built (Record) Drawings:
1. Shall be in accordance with Division 01.
2. Provide after installation is complete. Final s ignoff and Client acceptance will not occur prior to submission of As-built drawings to Architect/Engineer.
3. Indicate as-built conditions and all revisions, fully illustrating all revisions made by all trades in the course of work.
4. Dimension physical locations of ductwork, and pi ping with reference elevations and distances above finished floors, below beams, from wall faces, underground (invert elevations) and from column lines.
5. Exact location, type and function of concealed v alves, dampers, controllers, piping, air vents, piping drains and isolators.
6. Indicate all equipment sizes and capacities and tag numbers.
7. Provide drawing on reproducible bond.
8. These drawings shall be for as-built record purp oses for the Owner’s use and are not considered shop drawings.
I. Operating Instructions, Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists:
1. Before requesting acceptance of work, submit one set for review by Architect/Engineer.
2. After review, furnish two (2) printed and bound sets.
3. Include:
a. Installers name, address, telephone number and r epresentatives name, and website address.
b. Manufacturer's name, model number, service manua l, spare-parts list, and descriptive literature for all components, cross referenced and numbered on Record Drawings, and in accordance with Title 24 as required.
c. Maintenance instructions.
d. Listing of possible breakdown and repairs.
e. Instruction for starting, operation and programm ing.
441
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 5 of 15
f. Detailed and simplified one line, color coded fl ow and wiring diagram.
g. Field test report, including:
1) Instrument set points.
2) Normal operating values.
h. Name, address and phone number of contractor’s e quipment suppliers and service agencies.
i. Assemble manufacturer's equipment manuals in chr onological order, following the specification alpha-numeric system, in heavy duty 3-ring binders clearly titled on the spine and front cover with appropriate index dividers.
J. Special Tools:
1. One set of any special tools required to operate , adjust, dismantle or repair equipment furnished under any section of this Division.
2. "Special tools": those not normally found in po ssession of mechanics or maintenance personnel.
3. Tag each item and cross reference in Maintenance Manual.
4. Turn over to Owner's representative or temporari ly secure to unit at Architect's instruction.
K. Quantity of Submittals Required:
1. Product Data (brochures):
a. Submit electronic PDF copy of product data.
b. If comments are required, comment sheet(s) will be returned with submittal.
2. Samples:
a. Submit as required in each specification section .
1.6 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Reference standards of industry organizations, m anufacturer associates and professional associations that publish standards of construction and/or materials that are referenced in this Division are listed in Division 01. The Standards as referenced in this Specification shall be considered as attached and binding to 442
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 6 of 15
the requirements of the Construction Documents. The Contractor is to be considered as knowledgeable of these Standards and their requirements for the performance of the Work.
1.7 CODE COMPLIANCE
A. In addition to complying with all other legal re quirements, comply with current provisions of governing codes and regulations in effect during progress of the Work, and with the following:
1. Drawings and specification requirements shall go vern where they exceed Code and Regulation requirements.
2. Where requirements between governing Codes and R egulations vary, the more restrictive provisions shall apply.
3. Nothing contained in Contract Documents shall be construed as authority or permission to disregard or violate legal requirements. The Contractor shall immediately draw the attention of the Architect to any such conflicts noted in the Contract Documents.
1.8 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS
A. General:
1. Words or phrases such as "The Contractor shall," "shall be," "furnish," provide," “connect,” "a," "an," "the," and "all" etc. may be omitted for brevity.
2. The Drawings and Specifications are complimentar y each to the other.
Where discrepancies occur between the Drawings and Specifications, the more stringent provisions shall apply.
3. Examine all drawings and specifications prior to bidding the work. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer.
B. Specifications:
1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment and the Standards that govern. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment and materials other than the Basis of Design, including but not limited to architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler and plumbing.
2. Specifications are of simplified form and includ e incomplete sentences.
443
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 7 of 15
C. Drawings:
1. Drawings in general are diagrammatic and indicat e scope, sizes, routing, locations, connections to equipment and methods of installation, but not necessarily offsets, obstructions or structural conditions. Drawings are not intended to show every item, fitting, transition or offset in its exact dimension or detail of equipment or proposed system layout. Locations on drawings may be distorted for purposes of clearness and legibility.
2. Contractor to provide additional offsets, fittin gs, hangers, supports, valves, drains as required for construction and coordination with work of other trades.
3. Before proceeding with work, ordering or fabrica ting materials, check and verify all dimensions and carefully check space requirements with other Work to ensure that all equipment and materials can be installed in spaces allotted.
4. Contractor to assume all responsibility for fitt ing of materials and equipment to other parts of equipment and structure.
5. The Contractor is responsible for installing the work in such a manner that it will conform to the structure and architectural elements, avoid obstructions, maintain headroom, leave adequate clearance for proper maintenance and repairs, and provide clearances and access required by codes. Do not scale distances off of mechanical drawings. Use actual field measured building dimensions.
6. Make adjustments that may be necessary or reques ted in order to resolve space problems, preserve headroom, and avoid architectural openings, structural members and work of other trades.
7. Above items to be performed at no additional cos t to the Owner.
D. Typical details, where shown on the drawings, ap ply to each and every item of the project where such items are applicable. Typical details are not repeated in full on the plans, and are diagrammatic only, but with the intention that such details shall be incorporated in full.
1.9 DEFINITIONS
A. "Piping": pipe, tube, fittings, flanges, valves , controls, strainers, hangers, supports, unions, traps, drains, insulation, and related items.
B. "Motor Controllers": manual or magnetic starter s (with or without switches), individual pushbuttons or hand-off-automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors.
444
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 8 of 15
C. "Control" or "Actuating Devices": automatic sen sing and switching devices such as thermostats, pressure, float, electro-pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling operation of equipment.
1.10 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Adjoining work of other Divisions shall be exami ned for interferences and conditions affecting this Division.
B. Examine site related work and surfaces before st arting work of any Section.
1. Report to Architect, in writing, conditions whic h will prevent proper provision of this work.
2. Beginning work of any Section without reporting unsuitable conditions to Architect constitutes acceptance of conditions by Contractor.
3. Perform any required removal, repair or replacem ent of this work caused by unsuitable conditions at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Connections to existing work.
1. Unknown conditions will be addressed if reasonab le.
2. Contractor shall field verify existing dimension s prior to ordering or fabricating materials.
3. Install new work and connect to existing work wi th minimum interference to existing facilities.
4. Temporary shutdowns of existing services:
a. At no additional charges.
b. At times not to interfere with normal operation of existing facilities. c. Provide 48 hour notification.
5. Maintain continuous operation of existing facili ties as required with necessary temporary connections between new and existing work.
6. Restore existing disturbed work to original cond ition.
D. Removal and relocation of existing work.
1. Disconnect, remove or relocate material, equipme nt, plumbing fixtures, piping and other work noted and required by removal or changes in existing construction.
445
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 9 of 15
2. Where existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts whic h are to remain prevent installation of new work as indicated, relocate, or arrange for relocation, of existing pipes, conduits and/or ducts.
3. Provide new material and equipment required for relocated equipment.
4. Plug or cap active piping or ductwork behind or below finish.
5. Do not leave long dead-end branches. Cap or plug as close as possible to active line.
6. Remove unused piping, ductwork and material.
7. Dispose of removed fixtures and equipment as dir ected.
8. Turn over removed fixtures and equipment to Owne r as directed.
E. Special Traffic Requirements:
1. Maintain emergency and service entrances useable to pedestrian, truck, and ambulance traffic at all times.
2. Where trenches are cut, provide adequate bridgin g for above-mentioned traffic.
1.11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. See Division 01 for temporary facilities require d.
1.12 SCHEDULE OF WORK
A. Arrange work to conform to schedule of construct ion established or required to comply with Contract Documents.
B. In scheduling, anticipate means of installing eq uipment through available openings in structure.
C. Confirm in writing to Architect, within 30 days of signing of contract, anticipated number of days required to perform test, balance, and acceptance testing of mechanical systems:
1. This phase must occur after completion of mechan ical systems, including all control calibration and adjustment, and requires substantial completion of the building, including closure, ceilings, lighting, partitioning, etc.
2. Submit for approval at this time, names and qual ifications of test and balancing agencies to be used.
446
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 1 0 of 15
1.13 NOISE REDUCTION
A. Cooperate in reducing objectionable noise or vib ration caused by mechanical systems.
1. To extent of adjustments to specified and instal led equipment and appurtenances.
B. Correct noise problems caused by failure to inst all work in accordance with Contract Documents. Include labor and materials required as result of such failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS
A. Size for proper access, adjusting and maintenanc e:
1. 12 in. x 12 in. minimum for valves, trap primers , shock absorbers, etc.
2. 24 in. x 24 in. for man access to concealed fans , coils, etc., unless indicated otherwise.
B. Provide as required by work in this Division.
C. Style, Color and Finish to match adjacent constr uction and as approved by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
A. All material, equipment, devices, etc., shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the particular item. The Contractor shall be responsible for all installations contrary to the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall make all necessary changes and revisions to achieve such compliance. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be delivered to and maintained at the job site through the construction of the project.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All carpentry, cutting and patching to be done u nder trades doing that work.
Work shall be done in accordance with Division 01.
B. Provide all carpentry, cutting and patching requ ired for proper installation of material and equipment specified in Divisions 22 and 23. 447
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 1 1 of 15
C. Do not cut, notch or drill structural members wi thout consent of Architect.
D. All cutting and repairing shall conform to Title 21 of California Administrative Code.
3.3 CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Steel bolt with expansion anchor requiring a dri lled hole – powder driven anchors are not acceptable.
B. Minimum concrete embedment shall be 4-1/2 diamet ers unless otherwise noted on plans.
C. Minimum spacing shall be 12 diameters center to center and 6 diameters center to edge of concrete unless otherwise noted on plans.
D. Maximum allowable stresses for tension and shear shall be 80% of the ICBO test report values. Hilti.
3.4 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING
A. All equipment shall be securely anchored in acco rdance with CBC.
B. All equipment mounted on concrete shall be secur ed with a concrete anchor as specified above at each mounting point.
C. Secure base plate as indicated above.
3.5 SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. All mechanical systems (all ductwork, piping, et c.) shall be provided with supports and seismic restraints in accordance with Seismic Hazard Level ‘A’ of the “Guidelines for Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”, current issue, as published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA), Chantilly, Virginia and in accordance with CBC.
3.6 WATER PROOFING
A. Under General Construction Work.
B. Where any work pierces waterproofing, installati on shall be subject to review.
1. Provide all necessary sleeves, caulking, flashin g and flashing fittings required to make openings absolutely watertight.
448
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 1 2 of 15
C. Flashing:
1. Mechanical Contractor shall provide flashing for all work in this Division, unless otherwise provided by roofing installer, as required to accommodate roof slope, roofing material, and roof installation method.
No additional costs will be paid for lack of familiarity of Contractor with roofing type or slope.
2. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for c oordinating size of penetrations and locations with roofing contractor.
3. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for s cheduling installation of piping and other penetrations through roof structural system to exterior that they are complete and secure for the orderly installation of the roofing system.
4. 4 lb. lead.
5. 16 oz. lead coated copper.
6. No.22 USSG aluminum.
7. Fittings for piping through roof:
a. Galvanized cast iron bottom recess roof type.
b. Similar to Josam No. 26440 or No. 26450.
D. Provide weather protection canopies, hoods or en closures over out-of-door equipment which could be damaged by exposure to weather.
1. This requirement applies to:
a. Motors and drives.
b. Controls.
c. Instruments.
2. Identify items under such covers if entirely enc losed.
3.7 ACCESS TO VALVES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Access shall be possible where valves, expansion joints, fire dampers, motors, filters, control devices, and any other equipment requiring access for servicing, repairs, or maintenance are located in walls, soffits, chases, and/or above ceilings.
449
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 1 3 of 15
B. Definition of Accessible:
1. Valves and dampers may be operated.
2. Control devices may be adjusted.
3. Fire dampers may be reset.
4. Equipment access panels may be opened.
5. Normal maintenance work such as replacement of f ilters, lubrication of bearings, etc., may be performed readily within arm's reach of access opening.
6. It shall not be necessary to crawl through furre d ceiling space to perform such operations.
C. Install piping, equipment and accessories to per mit easy access for maintenance.
D. Group concealed valves, expansion joints, contro ls, dampers and equipment requiring service access, so as to be freely accessible through access doors and to minimize the number of access doors required.
E. Relocate piping equipment and accessories as req uired, at no extra cost to afford proper maintenance access.
F. Coordinate location of access panels with applic able trades installing walls or ceiling.
1. Coordinate panel locations with lights and other architectural features.
2. Submit proposed panel locations to Architect for review.
G. Arrange for location and marking of removable ti les in splined ceilings where access panels are not installed.
H. Existing Structures:
1. When installation requires access openings throu gh existing construction, coordinate location of necessary access panels, and arrange for respective trades to provide openings and framing which may be required.
2. Restore adjoining existing surfaces to original condition after new access panels have been installed.
450
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 1 4 of 15
3.8 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Work to be painted: Brush and clean work prior to concealing, painting and acceptance. Perform in stages if directed.
B. Painted or exposed work soiled or damaged: Clea n, repair and paint to match adjoining work before final acceptance.
C. Remove debris from inside and outside of materia ls and equipment.
D. Flush out piping after installation.
E. Adjust valves and automatic control devices.
F. Traps, wastes and supplies: unobstructed.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Division 01.
B. Tests:
1. Perform as specified in individual Divisions, an d as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Furnish written report and certification that te sts have been satisfactorily completed.
D. Repair or replace defective work, as directed.
E. Pay for restoring or replacing damaged work due to tests, as directed.
F. Pay for restoring or replacing damaged work of o thers, due to tests, as directed.
3.10 TRAINING
A. Provide training by qualified manufacturers' rep resentatives for equipment as specified in this Division.
B. Training to include:
1. Site-specific training.
2. Minimum hours as specified in each Section.
451
22-12479 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100 - 1 5 of 15
3. Training materials (minimum six sets).
4. Electronic media available from the manufacturer [two (2) copies].
C. Each training session to be scheduled with Owner at least 30 days in advance.
END OF SECTION
452
453
22-12479 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1 of 8
SECTION 230500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions c ommon to most piping systems.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Sleeves.
4. Escutcheons.
5. HVAC demolition.
6. Equipment installation requirements common to eq uipment sections.
7. Painting and finishing.
8. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical a nd electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to vie w indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to vie w outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed fr om view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed fr om view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupan ts but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for pla stic materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
454
22-12479 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 2 of 8
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rub ber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubbe r.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Mechanical sleeve seals.
2. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and op erators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and opera tors according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualific ation tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such prop osed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlig ht. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and open ings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting d evices and set sleeves in poured-in- place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. 455
22-12479 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 3 of 8
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and do ors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Acces s panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titl es below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free allo ys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, c opper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A 5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, desi gned for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shape d to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 456
22-12479 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 4 of 8
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel . Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with cor rosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealin g elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedul e 40, galvanized, plain ends.
B. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equiv alent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escu tcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of in sulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-s haped brass with polished chrome- plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patchi ng" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, e quipment, and components indicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping a nd cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.
3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts in dicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 457
22-12479 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 5 of 8
4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug duc ts with same or compatible ductwork material.
5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap ser vices and remove equipment.
6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Discon nect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriat e, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnec t and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is d amaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable port ions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requir ements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangemen ts were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless ot herwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and pipin g in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Dia gonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allo w sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and br anch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulatio n.
K. Select system components with pressure rating eq ual to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, c eilings, and floors according to the following:
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
458
22-12479 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 6 of 8
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concre te and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with bo th surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors o f mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished fl oor level. Extend cast- iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required t o secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new wa lls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. PVC or Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller th an NPS 6. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout .
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal a nnular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants a ppropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "J oint Sealants" for materials and installation.
O. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: S eal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to all ow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 in ches in diameter.
2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular spac e between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause se aling elements to expand and make watertight seal.
P. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: I nstall cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seal s. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular spac e between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause se aling elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated f ire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in .
459
22-12479 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 7 of 8
S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Secti ons of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the followin g requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flusha ble flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AW S's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing fill er metal complying with AWS A5.8.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unl ess otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible head room unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, ma intenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for pipi ng installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and compone nts is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
460
22-12479 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 8 of 8
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged f actory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications " for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, block ing, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate me mbers if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support appl ied loads.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base be aring surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout .
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION
461
22-12479 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 1 of 8
SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Pipe stands.
6. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for str uctural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Contr ols for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
3. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hange rs and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of T he Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers a nd equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified p rofessional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports fo r HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pi pe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 462
22-12479 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 2 of 8
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports fo r piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicate d.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualif y procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, fac tory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and w asher made of carbon steel.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field -fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS S P-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. Clement Support Services.
3. ERICO International Corporation.
4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
5. PHS Industries, Inc.
463
22-12479 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 3 of 8
6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Techn ology & Products, Inc.
7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: AST M C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100- psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanura te with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100- psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanura te with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.
D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shie ld shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield s hall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet met al shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type , zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out , tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.5 PIPE STANDS
A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V- shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
D. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-f abricated pipe supports made from structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, an d rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.
2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.
464
22-12479 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 4 of 8
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged , dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nong aseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive streng th.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as requi red to properly support piping from the building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field- fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and sp ace trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller d iameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-ste el shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to m anufacturer's written instructions.
E. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Asse mble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble compone nts or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with neces sary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. 465
22-12479 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 5 of 8
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and su pports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete sla bs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, inclu ding valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to pr ovide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
M. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles i f insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be us ed. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields o n cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be us ed. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the f ollowing:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
466
22-12479 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 6 of 8
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equ ipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipm ent and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabricat ions for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairlin e joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M proce dures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and metho ds used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distorti on and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughn ess shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribut e loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger a nd support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. U se same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minim um dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connec tions, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
467
22-12479 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 7 of 8
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metalli c coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for elec trolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and m etal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibi lity and up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pip es NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indica ted and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): Fo r support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indica ted and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 de g F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicate d and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
3. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
4. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of s teel I-beams. 468
22-12479 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 8 of 8
5. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads.
6. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
7. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length rec ommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting i nsulated pipe.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger se lections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system se lections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of buil ding attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION
469
22-12479 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1 of 4
SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicate d.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices w ith completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices w ith locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing ac oustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch or ano dized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for r equired label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three- fourths the size of principal lettering.
470
22-12479 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2 of 4
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tappi ng screws.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: White.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperat ures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for r equired label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three- fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tappi ng screws.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing desi gnation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans , details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equi pment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11- inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, detail s, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipm ent is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Red.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperat ures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for r equired label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inc hes, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include s econdary lettering two-thirds to three- fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tappi ng screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, comp atible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning info rmation, plus emergency notification instructions.
471
22-12479 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 3 of 4
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Label s: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Lettering Size: At least 1 inch high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substance s that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease , release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each maj or item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and vis ible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is spec ified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or ab ove accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance space s such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short tak eoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceiling s, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access po ints that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of o rigination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 20 feet along eac h run. Reduce intervals to 10
feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
472
22-12479 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 4 of 4
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Refrigerant Piping:
a. Background Color: Yellow.
b. Letter Color: Black.
END OF SECTION
473
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1 of 9
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TA B Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 45 days of Contracto r's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Proj ect's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Certified TAB reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB ent ity certified by AABC or NEBB with a minimum of 10 years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing experience.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contr actor and certified by AABC or NEBB.
474
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2 of 9
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the sit e and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operat ions to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familia r with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may pr eclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descri ptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and system s' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions an d requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredi cted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
F. Examine system and equipment installations and v erify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine test reports specified in individual sys tem and equipment Sections. 475
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3 of 9
H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify th at bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
I. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping c onnections and for clean and straight fins.
J. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.
Observe and record system reactions to changes in c onditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare rep orts. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operat ional.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely clo sed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where a ir-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided.
6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated con ditions for system operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total S ystem Balance" or NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for TAB,” and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabi nets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes i n ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.
2. Install and join new insulation that matches rem oved materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish ac cording to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measuremen ts in inch-pound (IP) units. 476
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4 of 9
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the sum mation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built " duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louv ers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, elect rical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with pro perly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve des ired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections a nd functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit co mponents.
K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specifi ed in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable f or Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets a nd inlets and calculate the total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to deter mine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outl et or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fa ns in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible con nection, and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fa ns through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.
477
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5 of 9
3. Measure static pressure across each component th at makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving ot her devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, un der final balanced conditions.
5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety fact ors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no ov erload will occur.
Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, eco nomizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain duc ts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch duc ts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow a t terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream fr om the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indi cated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making ad justments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments u sing branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to with in specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise level s above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanc ed conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial nu mber. 478
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6 of 9
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual b ypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including na me of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C. Record compressor data.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCIN G EXISTING
SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information.
3. Check the refrigerant charge.
4. Check the condition of filters.
5. Check the condition of coils.
6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condens ate-drain trap.
7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for pr oper lubrication.
8. Report on the operating condition of the equipme nt and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
B. Before performing testing and balancing of exist ing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:
1. New filters are installed.
2. Coils are clean and fins combed.
3. Drain pans are clean.
4. Fans are clean.
5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated .
6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. 479
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7 of 9
C. Perform testing and balancing of existing system s to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.
1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated w ork to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the f ace velocity of filters and coils.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renova ted work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the accep table limits defined by equipment manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flo w rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or les s, equipment adjustments are not required.
4. Balance each air outlet.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment w ith Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percen t.
a. Rooms with Multiple Supply Outlets: 0% to plus 10% of air flow rate in CFM for whole room indicated on drawings.
3. Outside Air Rates: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.10 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on exa mination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a re port on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing.
Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
3.11 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; ta bulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of th e report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedure s, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
480
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8 of 9
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipm ent installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performa nce; do not include Shop Drawings and product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the re port.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of page s defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it v aries from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer 's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance f orms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percen tage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume syst ems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure control ler. h. Other system operating conditions that affect pe rformance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of a ir and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhau st airflows.
2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3. Terminal units.
4. Balancing stations.
5. Position of balancing devices.
481
22-12479 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 9 of 9
3.12 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operat e each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is ope rating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.
2. Check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air ou tlets. b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temp erature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with fi nal balance position. d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in t he final report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and documen tation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurat ely documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.
2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer s hall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect shall randomly select mea surements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
3. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances all owed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
4. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greate r than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, t he testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:
1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; r esubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work accordi ng to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
482
483
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1 of 17 SECTION 230700
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
2. Adhesives.
3. Mastics.
4. Lagging adhesives.
5. Sealants.
6. Factory-applied jackets.
7. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
8. Field-applied jackets.
9. Tapes.
10. Securements.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner s.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicate d. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire- test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency accep table to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, 484
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 2 of 17 and cement material containers, with appropriate ma rkings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread inde x of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread ind ex of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and gra de, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hanger s, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping In staller for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation app lication, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirem ents for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure t esting systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulat ion application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule arti cles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercu ry, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless ste el shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. 485
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 3 of 17 D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stain less steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or H CFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or e xpanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or gla ss fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1 290, Type III with factory- applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirem ents are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirement s, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation ma terials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirement s, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Compan y; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C , Class 2, Grade A. 486
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 4 of 17
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirement s, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Compan y; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/ 80.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation ma terials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirement s, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Compan y; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50 .
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volu me and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, G rade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Compan y; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.
2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Color: White.
487
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 5 of 17
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation ma terials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
4. Color: White or gray.
5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Compan y; 95-44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation ma terials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: Aluminum.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-app lied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforce d scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: A pproximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
488
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 6 of 17
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 9 21, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock r eady for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material man ufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacke t if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radi us elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs , traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
C. Metal Jacket:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacket ing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field siz ing or Factory cut and rolled to size.
b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-appl ied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil -thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, sh ort- and long-radius elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
489
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 7 of 17 6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-f abricated fitting covers are not available.
2.9 TAPES
A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matchi ng factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Divi sion; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Compa ny; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squ ares of FSK tape.
B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching fi eld-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Divi sion; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Compa ny; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 500 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with ac rylic adhesive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Divi sion; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Compa ny; 488 AWF. 490
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 8 of 17 d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 5 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremen ts, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products; Bands.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240 M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, o r 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainle ss steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy or 0.062-in ch soft-annealed, stainless steel or
0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulate d have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean a nd dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfact ory conditions have been corrected.
491
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 9 of 17
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless stee l with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for ap propriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coati ng manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application metho ds for operating temperature range.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and f inishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of eq uipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barri ers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, a nd pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation m aterials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at to p and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longi tudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints p ractical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, s eams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported i tem to point of attachment to 492
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 10 of 17 structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to st ructure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or s ealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adja cent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket fro m tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufa cturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide st rips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward cl inching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dr y surface to receive self- sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching st aples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor- barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating co nditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying sa me facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond dam aged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insul ation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
493
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 11 of 17
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: I nstall insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulatio n, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applicat ions tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing seala nt.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulatio n, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applicat ions tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing seala nt.
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Par tition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and P artition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated wal ls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wa ll and partition penetrations.
Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacen t insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through f loor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assembl ies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleev e beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve an d duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through f loor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
494
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 12 of 17
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Str ainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strain ers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting ins ulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe ins ulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded w ith adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulatin g cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting ins ulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pi pe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to th e next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulati on or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for a djacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two time s the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thic ker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs , bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of o versized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by n ot less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
6. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for be low ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinfo rce the mastic with fabric- reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers , pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape ins ulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insul ating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manu facturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pip e flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
495
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 13 of 17
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments wi th cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that a llow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elb ows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that a llow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Speci alties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of s ame material as pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, i nstall cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for f lange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insul ation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Ple nums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's reco mmended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom o f horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smal ler, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches ma ximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inc hes, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizont al, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installati on. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed was hers. 496
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 14 of 17 f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond spee d washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insula tion section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vap or barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier ma stic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with t ape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums ope rating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of va por-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surfac e to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches o n longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spa ced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows an d transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on ro und and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges t hat protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1- inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install wi th longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manu facturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agenc y to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
497
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 15 of 17 C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect , by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly sele cted by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in re verse order of their installation.
Extent of inspection shall be limited to one locati on(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Arti cle. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.
3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, r andomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in lay ers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limite d to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three l ocations of welded fittings, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations o f flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
D. All insulation applications will be considered d efective work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.
3.10 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply, return and outdoor air .
2. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
3. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
B. Items Not Insulated:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickn ess to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration-control devices.
6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Round, flat-oval, and rectangular, supply-air an d return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75- lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.12 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATIO N SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identif ied below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. 498
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 16 of 17 B. Round and rectangular, supply-air and return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.13 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size ran ge. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated , do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 De g F:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick.
B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I : 1 inch thick.
3.15 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For in sulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection f rom materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. None.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 20 mils thick.
3.16 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For in sulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. 499
22-12479 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 17 of 17 B. If more than one material is listed, selection f rom materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Exposed:
1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z-shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick.
END OF SECTION
500
501
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 of 14
SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittin gs.
3. Sheet metal materials.
4. Duct liner.
5. Sealants and gaskets.
6. Hangers and supports.
7. Seismic-restraint devices.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Bal ancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.
2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for d ampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, inclu ding sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and suppor ts and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Constru ction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7.
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with th e airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
502
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 of 14
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following pr oducts:
1. Liners and adhesives.
2. Sealants and gaskets.
3. Seismic-restraint devices.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, includi ng plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, lin er material, and static-pressure classes.
4. Elevation of top of ducts.
5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
6. Fittings.
7. Reinforcement and spacing.
8. Seam and joint construction.
9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partit ions.
10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampe rs, turning vanes, and access doors and panels.
12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duc t and building attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. Sheet metal thicknesses.
2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.
3. Reinforcement details and spacing.
4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in A SHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up." 503
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 of 14
D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirement s in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with S MACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabri cate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable seal ing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMA CNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabri cate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, appl icable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and oth er provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections , and Other Duct Construction:
Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "H VAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittin gs and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC D uct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with S MACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
a. McGill AirFlow LLC.
b. SEMCO Incorporated.
c. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
d. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the d uct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).
C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabri cate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - 504
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 of 14
Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisi ons in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabri cate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicabl e sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisi ons in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate a ccording to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figur e 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for stat ic-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support inte rvals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMAC NA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable mate rials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicate d. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/ A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill pho sphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36 M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and pla tes are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with b utyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum di ameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.4 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 10 71, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville.
505
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 of 14
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
a. Type I, Flexible: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x d eg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
3. Sound Absorption Coefficients:
a. Type I, Flexible: NRC minimum 0.70 at 1.5 PCF a nd 1” thickness. b. Type II, Rigid: NRC minimum 0.85 at 3.0 PCF and 1-1/2” thickness.
4. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a m oisture repellent and erosion- resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.
5. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90 A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Insulation Pins and Washers:
1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Cop per- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding , 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with i ntegral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washe rs formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as requir ed to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMA CNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. A ttaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner faci ng upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat jo int with adhesive.
4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangula r ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.
5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with lon gitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standa rd liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
506
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 of 14
6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are int egrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
a. Fan discharges.
b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts whe re air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm or where indicated.
2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface -burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-sprea d index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, posi tive and negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet ste el (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicon e, elastomeric.
2. Type: S.
3. Grade: NS.
4. Class: 25.
5. Use: O.
6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cf m/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 507
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 of 14
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fa stened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadm ium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electro galvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct H angers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvani zed steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated ste el assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind riv ets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized -steel shapes and plates.
2.7 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Indust ries.
2. Kinetics Noise Control.
3. Mason Industries.
4. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC.
5. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an a gency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maxi mum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
508
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 of 14
C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricat ed support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and t orsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and t o building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.
D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized or ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemb lies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and w ith an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.
E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle cl amped to hanger rod.
F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wed ge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurati ons, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-hand ling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct C onstruction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertic ally and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construct ion, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus a llowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the part ition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
509
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9 of 14
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior par titions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Se ction "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors installed and/or stored o n site from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.
1. Cover and seal open ends of ducts with plastic w rap and duct tape.
2. Turn off ventilation system and protect duct int eriors from dust infiltration during dust producing activities (e.g. demolition, drywall installation, finishing).
3. At the end of each workday, cover and seal open ends or openings of installed ducts with plastic wrap and duct tape.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from be ing dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a s mooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of bu rrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.
When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 fini sh, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity i n the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
3.3 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classe s, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Seal ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Cons truction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Sta ndards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder- actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 510
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10 of 14
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for stand ard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners fo r lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners fo r seismic restraints.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and wit hin 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or chan nel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum interval of 16 feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull- out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed t o support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspe nded with vibration isolators.
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to up per truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.
G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforce ment or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforci ng steel or other embedded items 511
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 11 of 14
are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage durin g anchor installation.
Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with s leeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque , using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior a pplications and stainless-steel anchors for applications exposed to weather.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible conn ectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Sta ndards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.7 PAINTING
A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible t hrough registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, la tex paint over a compatible galvanized- steel primer. Paint materials and application requ irements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
3.8 DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before tes ting, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Clean the following components by removing surfa ce contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan h ousings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vane s, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and componen ts including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, conde nsate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turnin g vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turnin g vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. 512
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 12 of 14
3.9 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Divisi on 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel exce pt as otherwise indicated.
B. Supply and Return Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Hea t Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 .
2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 .
3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 .
C. Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressur e, and A if positive pressure.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 .
2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressur e, and A if positive pressure.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 .
513
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 13 of 14
D. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Du cts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Hea t Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 .
2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 .
3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 .
E. Intermediate Reinforcement:
1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carb on steel coated with zinc- chromate primer.
F. Liner:
1. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1-1/2 i nches thick.
2. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1-1/2 i nches thick.
3. Supply Fan Plenums: Fibrous glass, Type II, 2 in ches thick.
4. Return-Fan Plenums: Fibrous glass, Type II, 2 i nches thick.
5. Outside Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1-1/2 inches thick.
G. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Du ct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diam eter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diam eter ratio and two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMAC NA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Sup port in Elbows."
2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Con struction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
514
22-12479 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 14 of 14
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segme nts: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
H. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Du ct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connecti ons" and details provided on drawings.
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degr ee entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: 45 degree Lea d-In Low-loss.
2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 De gree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. All shall be 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION
515
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 of 9
SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual volume dampers.
4. Flange connectors.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Remote damper operators.
7. Duct-mounted access doors.
8. Flexible connectors.
9. Flexible ducts.
10. Duct accessory hardware.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" f or duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicate d.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include p lans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installa tion in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and othe r construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
c. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeve s; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators.
d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 516
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 of 9
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct ac cessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Condi tioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Sta ndards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duc t construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall b e free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/ A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-ste el reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum di ameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requir ements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Duro Dyne Inc.
2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
3. Nailor Industries Inc.
4. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
5. Ruskin Company.
6. Ventfabrics, Ventlok.
B. Description: Gravity balanced.
C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg.
517
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 of 9
E. Frame: 0.052-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6 -inch width, 0.025-inch- thick, roll- formed aluminum with sealed edges.
G. Blade Action: Parallel.
H. Blade Seals: Vinyl foam.
I. Blade Axles:
1. Material: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel.
2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.
J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings .
M. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertic al airflow installations.
3. Chain pulls.
4. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum.
b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.
5. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.
6. Screen Material: Galvanized steel or Aluminum.
7. Screen Type: Bird.
8. 90-degree stops.
2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
a. McGill AirFlow LLC.
b. METALAIRE, Inc.
c. Nailor Industries Inc.
d. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
e. Ruskin Company.
f. Duro Dyne Inc.
g. Ventfabrics, Ventlok.
2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside ai rstream. 518
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4 of 9
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications .
4. Frames:
a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inc h minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless fr ames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel .
7. Bearings:
a. Molded synthetic or Stainless-steel sleeve.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Jackshaft:
1. Size: 1-inch diameter.
2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.
C. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, spring loaded, serrated die-cast co re with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mou nting.
2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cool ey, Inc.
B. Description: Roll-formed, factory-fabricated, sl ide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.
519
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5 of 9
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.
4. SEMCO Incorporated.
5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cool ey, Inc.
6. Aero Dyne HEP.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Dou ble wall, hollow metal, airfoil shape blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVA C Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
D. Vane Construction: Double wall.
2.6 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
2. Ventfabrics, Inc.
3. Young Regulator Company.
B. Description: Cable system designed for remote m anual damper adjustment.
C. Tubing: Brass.
D. Cable: Stainless steel.
E. Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed, 2 inches deep.
F. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Stainless steel.
520
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6 of 9
2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. McGill AirFlow LLC.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
9. Ventfabrics, Inc.
10. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Coo ley, Inc.
B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access pan els according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexi ble"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class.
c. Vision panel.
d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hi nge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct p ressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over t abs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hin ges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinge s and two compression latches.
2.8 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Flame Gard, Inc.
3. 3M.
B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel. 521
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 7 of 9
D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high -temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F.
F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive o r negative.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cool ey, Inc.
B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fa brics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Cla ss 1.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch -thick, galvanized sheet steel or
0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F .
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glas s fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 500 lbf/inch in the w arp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F .
2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. McGill AirFlow LLC.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cool ey, Inc.
4. J.P. Lamborn Co.
522
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 8 of 9
B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, blac k polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor- barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inc h wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
4. Insulation R-Value: R-6.
C. Flexible Duct Connectors:
1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast alumin um to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of p itot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neopre ne based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for me tal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass d ucts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fa ns or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, retu rn, outside-air and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dam pers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channel s of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum duct s.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testin g, adjusting, and balancing. 523
22-12479 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 9 of 9
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to a llow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke da mpers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors.
2. Control devices requiring inspection.
3. Elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install access doors with swing against duct sta tic pressure.
J. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
K. Label access doors according to Division 23 Sect ion "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M. Connect diffusers to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexibl e duct clamped or strapped in place.
N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with stain less steel bands plus adhesive/sealant.
O. Install duct test holes where required for testi ng and balancing purposes.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement .
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify tha t purpose of access door can be performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and sm oke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure inst allation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full r ange of movement of operator and damper.
END OF SECTION
524
525
22-12479 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1 of 4
SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99 .
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnish ed specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system ope rating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, pl us motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and opera tors.
6. Fan speed controllers.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power venti lators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptabl e to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with per formance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
526
22-12479 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 2 of 4
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessor ies shall comply with NEMA standards.
D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply wit h UL 705.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the e xtent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required fo r moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's desig nated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural suppo rt members.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Greenheck.
2. Loren Cook Company.
3. Penn Ventilation.
B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for inst alling in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line applications.
C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulatio n.
D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
E. Grille: Stainless steel or Painted aluminum, lo uvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for elect rical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.
G. Accessories:
527
22-12479 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 3 of 4
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.
2. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
3. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, a nd transition fittings.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301 , "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. " Label fans with the AMCA- Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, p ressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratin gs according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; us e steel wire or metal straps.
C. Install units with clearances for service and ma intenance.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements ar e specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to a llow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Sectio n "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
528
22-12479 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 4 of 4
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspection s and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supp orting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operati on.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
8. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperatu re-control operators.
9. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and rete st as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operati on.
B. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting , and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
C. Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION
529
22-12479 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 233723 - 1 of 5
SECTION 233723
HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof hoods.
2. Goosenecks.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Water Entrainment: Limit water penetration thro ugh unit to comply with ASHRAE 62.1- 2004.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicate d.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Alumi num."
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel ."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, eq uipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
530
22-12479 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 233723 - 2 of 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, wi th No. 4 finish.
E. Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fasten ed metal or 300 Series stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation co nditions.
2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exp osed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
F. Post-Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonr y: Torque-controlled expansion anchors made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain without failure a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed f or concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing per A STM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Factory or shop fabricate gravity ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessar y for shipping and handling.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to f it in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation to lerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
C. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and e xposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E. Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel. 531
22-12479 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 233723 - 3 of 5
2.3 ROOF HOODS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
2. Loren Cook Company.
3. PennBarry.
B. Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figures 5-6 and 5-7.
C. Materials: Galvanized-steel sheet, minimum 0.064 -inch-thick base and 0.040-inch-thick hood or Aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063-inch-thick ba se and 0.050-inch-thick hood; suitably reinforced.
D. Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitere d and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to insid e walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer.
Size as required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.
1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant stri p, with mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 10 inches minimum.
E. Bird Screening: Galvanized-steel, 1/2-inch-squar e mesh, 0.041-inch wire or Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
F. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012 -inch wire.
G. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, gr ease, and other contaminants.
Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded ar eas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coatin g suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat and an overall minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from m anufacturer's full range.
2.4 GOOSENECKS
A. Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 5-5; with a minimum o f 0.052-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
532
22-12479 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 233723 - 4 of 5
B. Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitere d and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to insid e walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer.
Size as required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.
1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant stri p, with mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 10 inches minimum.
C. Bird Screening: Galvanized-steel, 1/2-inch-squar e mesh, 0.041-inch wire or Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
D. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012 -inch wire.
E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finish:
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, gr ease, and other contaminants.
Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded ar eas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coatin g suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat and an overall minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from m anufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install gravity ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Install goosenecks on curb base where throat siz e exceeds 9 by 9 inches.
C. Install gravity ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Install perimeter reveals and openings of unifor m width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
E. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fill ers, and insulation as installation progresses. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation.
F. Label gravity ventilators according to requireme nts specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
G. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on sur faces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
533
22-12479 HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS 233723 - 5 of 5
H. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, sol dering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations , and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements ar e specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operati on.
END OF SECTION
534
535
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 1 of 9
SECTION 235400
FURNACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories c omplete with controls.
2. Air filters.
3. Refrigeration components.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operati ng characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each of the following:
1. Furnace.
2. Thermostat.
3. Air filter.
4. Ventilation heat exchanger.
5. Refrigeration components.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, comp onents, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wir ing.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnac e to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals for each of the following:
1. Furnace and accessories complete with controls.
2. Air filter.
3. Ventilation heat exchanger.
4. Refrigeration components.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Se ction. 536
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 2 of 9
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptabl e to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in A SHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable r equirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furna ces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period:
1. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substanti al Completion:
a. Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years.
b. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit B oard: Five years. c. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years.
d. Refrigeration Compressors: [10 years] [Lifetime ] <Insert value>. e. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: [Five years] <I nsert value>.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requi rements, provide products by one of the following:
537
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 3 of 9
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; Div. of United Technologies Corp.
2. Trane.
3. York International Corp.; a division of Unitary Products Group.
D. General Requirements for Gas-Fired, Condensing F urnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.4 7/CSA 2.3, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and with NFPA 54.
E. Cabinet: Steel.
1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory-installed insulation.
2. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all oth er items requiring access for maintenance.
3. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer' s standard color.
4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with th e airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
F. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient m ounted, direct drive.
1. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Divisio n 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
2. Special Motor Features: Single speed, Premium ( TM) efficiency, as defined in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment," and with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.
3. Special Motor Features: Electronically controll ed motor (ECM) controlled by integrated furnace/blower control.
G. Type of Gas: Natural.
H. Heat Exchanger:
1. Primary: Stainless steel.
2. Secondary: Stainless steel.
I. Burner:
1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety single-stage main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure regulator, safety pilot with electronic fl ame sensor, limit control, transformer, and combination ignition/fan timer control board.
2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-sur face igniter or electric spark ignition.
J. Gas-Burner Safety Controls:
1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve fro m opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas flow on ignition failure.
2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation.
3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissibl e setting; de-energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.
538
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 4 of 9
K. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan variabl e speed with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings prepurges heat exchanger and ve nts combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace operation if combu stion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.
L. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories.
M. Accessories:
1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: PVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-air inlet and vent through roof.
2. CPVC Plastic Vent Materials.
a. CPVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 441/F 441M. b. CPVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying w ith ASTM F 438, socket type.
c. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493.
1) Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content o f 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D ( EPA Method 24).
2) Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 55 0 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. PVC Plastic Vent Materials:
a. PVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with A STM D 1785. b. PVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying w ith ASTM D 2466, socket type.
c. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
1) Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D ( EPA Method 24).
2) Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 55 0 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 THERMOSTATS
A. Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounting, programm able, microprocessor-based unit with automatic switching from heating to cooling, p referential rate control, seven-day programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day, and battery backup protection against power failure for program settings.
B. Control Wiring: Unshielded twisted-pair cabling .
1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair.
2. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
539
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 5 of 9
C. Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRA E/IESNA 90.1-2004, "Controls."
2.3 AIR FILTERS
A. Disposable Filters: 2-inch-thick fiberglass med ia with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 13 or higher, in sheet metal frame.
2.4 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS
A. General Refrigeration Component Requirements:
1. Refrigeration compressor, coils, and specialties shall be designed to operate with CFC-free refrigerants.
2. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than pre scribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1- 2004, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically exp anded into aluminum fins. Comply with ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment." Match size with furnace. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet[ complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004].
1. Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching fur nace and evaporator coil, with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at o r on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint.
C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized with nitrogen, sealed, and with suction line insulated. Provide in standard lengths for installation without joints, except at equipment connections.
1. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or e xpanded-rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, 1 inch thick.
D. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Unit:
1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounti ng holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed scroll type.
a. Crankcase heater.
b. Vibration isolation mounts for compressor.
c. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current -sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
d. Two-speed compressor motors shall have manual-re set high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
e. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanicall y bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
540
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 6 of 9
4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connecte d to motor.
5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral th ermal-overload protection.
6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 d eg F.
7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer pre sent, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine factory-installed insulation before furn ace installation. Reject units that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for gas and refrigerant pipi ng systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfact ory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel a nd vent features and systems according to NFPA 54.
B. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if required by installation conditions.
1. Anchor furnace to substrate to resist code-requi red seismic acceleration.
C. Controls: Install thermostats at mounting heigh t of 48 inches above floor.
D. Wiring Method: Install control wiring in access ible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be us ed. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces.
E. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser compo nents on equipment supports as detailed on plans. Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Gas piping installation requirements are specifi ed in Division 22. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specia lties. Connect gas piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow se rvice and maintenance. 541
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 7 of 9
C. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas -Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and ext end outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt.
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
3. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practic e of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
b. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 28 46M Appendix. c. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule- number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. d. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials:
1) Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content o f 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D ( EPA Method 24).
2) Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 55 0 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
4. Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to outside te rminal.
D. Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector . Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
E. Connect refrigerant tubing kits to refrigerant c oil in furnace and to air-cooled, compressor-condenser unit.
1. Flared Joints: Use ASME B16.26 fitting and flar ed ends, following procedures in CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
2. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flusha ble flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder allo y complying with ASTM B 32.
3. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AW S's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspection s and prepare test reports:
1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanica l inspection. 542
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 8 of 9
2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems w ith refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry ha s been energized, start units to confirm proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
4. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible con nections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Complete installation and startup checks accordi ng to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casings.
2. Verify that access doors move freely and are wea thertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connecti ons.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operation al.
B. Start unit according to manufacturer's written i nstructions and complete manufacturer's operational checklist.
C. Measure and record airflows.
D. Verify proper operation of capacity control devi ce.
E. After startup and performance test, lubricate be arings.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency.
543
22-12479 FURNACES 235400 - 9 of 9
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, clean furnaces in ternally according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 da ys after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
544
545
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 1 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 237413
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specificat ion Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central -station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories:
1. Direct-expansion cooling.
2. Gas furnace.
3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper sectio n.
4. Integral, space temperature controls.
5. Roof curbs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.
C. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, th is abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.
D. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-condit ioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
E. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil i n the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air- conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
F. VVT: Variable-air volume and temperature.
546
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 2 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, charac teristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, comp onents, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wir ing.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to inc lude in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Se ction.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ARI Compliance:
1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for test ing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.
2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system s afety.
2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing coo ling and heating coils.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62 .1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable re quirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptabl e to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials o r workmanship within specified warranty period.
547
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 3 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules : Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacture r's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carrier Corporation.
2. Trane
3. JCI/York
2.2 CASING
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: F ormed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for a ccess to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.
B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electri cal and piping connections and lifting lugs.
1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch thick.
C. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements:
1. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.034 inch thic k.
D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFP A 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface co ated with an erosion- and temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galva nized or stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches deep , and complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between wa lls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight.
548
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 4 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Corrosion-resistant co mpound.
F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with th e airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
2.3 FANS
A. Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, fo rward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, ECM motor resiliently mount ed in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
B. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forw ard curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installe d on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or pai nted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
C. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.
D. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
2.4 COILS
A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:
1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless internally finned copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor.
2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan.
3. Coil Split: Interlaced.
2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: One or Two.
B. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibrati on isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.
C. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic el ement.
3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.
5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.
6. Minimum off-time relay.
7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overloa d.
8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suc tion and liquid lines.
9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.
549
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 5 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
10. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable mag netic coil, thermostatic expansion valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.
2.6 AIR FILTRATION
A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Pleated: Minimum MERV 13.
2.7 GAS FURNACE
A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wire d; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.
1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bea ring label of CSA.
B. Burners: Stainless steel.
1. Fuel: Natural gas.
2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spa rk or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.
C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.
D. Venting: Gravity vented.
E. Safety Controls:
1. Gas Control Valve: Two stage.
2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 2 4-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pres sure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.
2.8 ECONOMIZER
A. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Paralle l- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel low leakage dampers. Gear driven so dampers operate simultaneously.
1. Actuator and controls shall be compliant with 20 19 T24 California Energy Code.
2. Damper Motor: 0-100% Modulating with adjustable minimum position.
3. Differential Dry bulb temperature control.
4. 2019 T24 California Energy Code compliant Fault Detection Diagnostics, FDD.
5. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorize d.
550
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 6 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION
A. Provide for single connection of power to unit w ith unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit tr ansformer with built-in overcurrent protection.
2.10 CONTROLS
A. Coordinate control equipment and sequence of ope rations with schedules on plans.
B. Thermostat:
1. Control-voltage transformer.
2. Title 24 OCST Compliant
3. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the follo wing features:
a. 7-Day Programmable with Holiday Schedules
b. Volatile-memory backup to maintain programming u pon loss of power c. Heat-Cool-Auto-Off switch.
d. Fan on-auto switch.
e. Fan-speed switch.
f. Automatic changeover.
g. Adjustable deadband.
h. Exposed set point.
i. Exposed indication.
j. Degree F indication.
k. Unoccupied-period-override push button.
2.11 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof curb manufacturer shall provide seismic cal culations stamped and signed by CA licensed SE for pitched curb with factory unit hold down attachments.
B. Materials: Fully welded, galvanized steel with c orrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.
1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.
b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.
a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitabl e for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duc t without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer a nd without causing leakage in cabinet.
551
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 7 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
c. Liner materials applied in this location shall h ave air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
C. Curb Height: As detailed on plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.
B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual lo cations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfact ory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illu stration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction sp ecified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and s ecure curb base to roof framing per details on plans.
B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural c urbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.
C. Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection siz e, with trap. Route to drain per plans.
B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.
1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 22. Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. 552
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 8 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The fol lowing are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb .
2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb.
3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
4. Install return-air duct continuously through roo f structure.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, a nd equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test r eports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, a nd equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circu itry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, a nd tie-down straps.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry ha s been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and rete st as specified above.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representati ve to perform startup service.
B. Complete installation and startup checks accordi ng to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:
1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans.
4. Inspect internal insulation.
5. Verify that labels are clearly visible.
6. Verify that clearances have been provided for se rvicing.
7. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
553
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 9 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
8. Verify that filters are installed.
9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for constructio n debris.
10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
11. Connect and purge gas line.
12. Remove packing from vibration isolators.
13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers.
14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.
15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in corr ect direction without vibration and binding.
16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tensio n.
17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system.
b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient tem perature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Con tractor's startup report.
18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks an d protective devices; verify sequences.
19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommend ed or required by manufacturer.
20. Perform the following operations for both minim um and maximum firing. Adjust burner for peak efficiency.
a. Measure gas pressure on manifold.
b. Inspect operation of power vents.
c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to c ombustion chamber. d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharg e.
e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record f lue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration.
f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when b urner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
21. Calibrate thermostats.
22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.
23. Inspect economizer and relief dampers for prope r operation.
24. Start refrigeration system and measure and reco rd the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:
a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures .
b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperature s.
c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature.
d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temper ature.
25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heat ing, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.
26. Measure and record the following minimum and ma ximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
a. Supply-air volume.
b. Return-air volume.
c. Relief-air volume.
d. Outdoor-air intake volume.
554
22-12479 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION 237413 - 10 of 10
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas press ures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil o r from condenser fans to outdoor-air intake.
28. Verify operation of remote panel including pilo t-light operation and failure modes.
Inspect the following:
a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchang er. b. Low-temperature safety operation.
c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm.
d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover.
e. Relief-air fan operation.
f. Smoke and firestat alarms.
29. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.
3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site durin g other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
B. After completing system installation and testing , adjusting, and balancing RTU and air- distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representati ve to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. R efer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION
555
22-12479 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK 260000 - 1 of 6
SECTION 260000
SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections shall form a part of this Section, with the same force and effect as though repeated here.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. In general, the Electrical Work described herein consists of the modification of existing electrical, lighting and signal systems in place and the installation of new electrical, lighting, signal, and fire sprinkler monitoring systems equipment. All work shall be completed as directed by the Owner's authorized representative, in accordance with the Contract, Specifications and Construction Documents listed below.
1. General Conditions of Contract
2. Specifications:
Section Title
260000 Summary of Electrical Work
260100 General Conditions for Electrical Work
260500 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
260526 Grounding
262413 Switchboards
262416 Panelboards
265113 Lighting
266100 Lighting Control Systems
269500 Electrical Acceptance Tests
272000 Telecommunications System
3. Electrical Construction Drawings as listed on the Drawing Index of the Construction Drawing set:
Number Title
E100 Electrical Site Plan
E200 Electrical Power Plan – First Floor
E210 Electrical Power Plan - Roof
E300 Lighting Plan
E400 Signal Plan – First Floor
E600 Electrical Details
E700 Single Line Diagram
E800 Electrical Symbol Legend and Schedules
E801 Panel Schedules
E900 Energy Code Documentation
E901 Energy Code Documentation
E902 Energy Code Documentation
E903 Energy Code Documentation
556
22-12479 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK 260000 - 2 of 6
B. This Section includes all necessary and required work to complete the construction as indicated in the Drawings, called for by notes or schedules, or specified herein. This work includes the furnishing of all permits, labor, supervision, services, materials, tools, equipment, testing, transportation and miscellaneous expenses, and the performance of all operations necessary to or incidental to completion of lawful and operating electrical power, lighting and signal systems, whether or not specifically mentioned.
C. All work not shown in complete detail shall be installed per the CEC and in conformance with the best standard practice for the trade. Any deviation from the approved Drawings shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer and Owner for approval prior to the installation of the work in question.
D. This work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following elements:
1. Demolition and Phasing:
a. De-energize, disconnect and remove electrical feeds to devices and equipment being removed or relocated.
b. Disconnect and remove existing electrical facilities in areas of remodel and demolition that are not to be reused.
c. Make temporary feeds and connections to areas and equipment to allow phased construction and continuing operation.
2. Electrical Service:
a. New electrical service, as shown, complete with all conductors, transformers, conduit, metering devices, etc. from the utility company point of service to the Project service switchboards as required by the local utility, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
b. Coordinate with utility company to ensure compliance with applicable service standards, specifications, and utility point of connection.
3. Electrical Distribution:
a. Power distribution system, as shown, complete with switchboards, panelboards, conduits, feeders, pull boxes, fittings and related equipment and equipment pads.
b. Trenching, conduits and feeders for electrical power including connections to relocatable buildings.
4. Grounding
a. Grounding system including installations of ground rods, ufer grounds, and ground rings, as shown. Connections to water and/or gas piping and building steel.
b. Provide the following grounding electrodes at each building, bonded together to form the grounding electrode system:
1) Metal underground water pipe in direct contact with the earth for ten feet or more and electrically continuous to the points of connection of the grounding electrode conductor and the bonding conductors. 2) The metal frame of the building, where effectively grounded. 3) Concrete encased electrode (Ufer ground) consisting of a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor (size 4 minimum)
557
22-12479 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK 260000 - 3 of 6
encased by a minimum of 2 inches of concrete, located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth.
4) Ground rod of copper clad steel, minimum ¾ inch diameter, minimum 10 feet long, driven full length into the earth. If a maximum resistance to ground of 5 ohms cannot be obtained with a single ground rod, provide additional ground rods installed not closer than 6 feet apart until a maximum resistance to ground of 5 ohms is obtained.
c. Provide a main ground bus cabinet in the main switchboard room. Provide ground bus cabinets in electrical closets connected to the main ground bus cabinet with a #3/0 copper conductor. Above ground connections of underground cables to equipment and/or structural steel as shown on the Construction drawings and as required by Code.
d. Bonding of adjacent modular buildings.
e. Testing of grounding system as outlined in Section 26 95 00.
5. Signal Distribution:
a. Trenching, conduits and conductors for signal systems including connections to relocatable buildings.
b. Building mounted conduits and conductors for signal systems including connections to relocatable buildings.
c. Trenching and conduits for control systems as required by Division 15 21-25 Specification Sections.
6. Building Electrical and Mechanical Systems:
a. Complete system of branch circuit wiring, conduit and distribution equipment for lighting, receptacles and power.
b. Electrical work associated with mechanical equipment, including conduit, conductor, disconnect switches and motor starters.
c. Furnish roof jacks for the weatherproofing of each electrical conduit penetrating the roof. Roof jacks shall be of the material specified for the specific roofing system
and shall be delivered to the general
contractor/construction manager for installation by the roofing contractor. d. Connection to all equipment as furnished by other Sections of these Specifications or as listed on Drawings as furnished by Owner. e. Remove, extend and re-install electrical devices in/on walls receiving new wall coverings.
f. Disconnect, demolish (where possible), and abandon all underground branch circuits and feeders.
g. Provide new branch circuits and feeders to replace those demolished.
Circuits and feeders are to be hidden in walls where wall surfaces are being replaced.
h. Provide surface wireways for replacement of circuits and feeders where wall surfaces are to remain.
7. Lighting:
558
22-12479 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK 260000 - 4 of 6
a. Replace existing Lighting System with new Lighting System as shown in Drawings, including fixtures, hangers, lamps, wall switches and lighting controls.
b. Provide complete lighting system including fixtures, hangers, lamps, wall switches and lighting controls.
c. Provide complete Lighting Control System consisting of motion sensors, timer switches and other controls as shown in Drawings.
8. Data Distribution System
a. Complete Data system per Specification Section 27 20 00 including Category 5 and Fiber Optic Patch Panels and required Patch Cables, Category 5 Data Cable and Jacks, Fiber Optic Cable, Jacks and Innerduct, access panels, terminal cabinets, conduit, wiring and terminations for a complete working system.
9. Intrusion Detection System
a. Provide conduit pathway with pull wire for pathways to existing Intrusion system.
10. Fire Sprinkler Monitoring System:
a. Complete Fire Sprinkler Monitoring System including fire sprinkler monitoring panel *Potter PFC-600 and addressable modules. b. Installation of two (2) Type RJ31X Telephone Jacks at Fire Sprinkler Alarm Panel location and wiring back to Main Telephone Backboard.
11. Each system shall be terminated, tested and calibrated by a factory-authorized installer. This same installer shall terminate and test any peripheral equipment required for the operation of the system.
12. Equipment Connections
a. Provide equipment connections and coordination in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and product submittals.
b. Provide equipment connections and disconnect switches as required for the following equipment:
1) Mechanical equipment.
2) Rollup Door
3) Owner furnished equipment.
E. Products supplied by Owner (or others, as noted) and installed by Contractor under this Section.
1. None.
F. Products supplied by Contractor but not installed under this Section.
1. None.
G. Work specifically excluded from this Division.
1. Furnishing of motors.
559
22-12479 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK 260000 - 5 of 6
2. Work performed under SECTION 13120, PRE-ENGINEERED FABRICATED STRUCTURES, shall be EXCLUDED from this Section.
H. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. None
I. It shall be understood that the existing conduit with its wiring is presently active (hot), in operation with its pertinent equipment.
J. It shall be noted that this construction work will be planned and executed during ongoing operation of the facility. Any modifications to the existing equipment currently in operation shall be done during scheduled shutdowns and coordinated with the Owner's authorized representative and facility operating personnel to assure minimum downtime.
K. In order to avoid disruption to facility operations, certain items of work must be completed before other items of work can be started. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner's authorized representative as to the sequence of construction activities.
L. Drawings showing equipment layout, conduit runs, conduit sizes, number of wires, wire types, wire groupings and size will not be furnished. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prepare such drawings in accordance with specifications, project requirements and code to facilitate the installation.
M. Coordinate with the civil engineer to locate the concrete pad and the knock out box in the pad for the high voltage conduits and electrical power circuits.
N. Furnish, install and connect an underground grounding system, specifically mentioned on drawings as part of this contract, including all necessary materials and connections as required by code and/or as shown on the construction drawing.
O. Furnish, install and connect all above grade grounding materials and make aboveground connections of underground cables to equipment and/or structural steel as shown on the construction drawings and as required by code.
P. Size, furnish, install and connect new conduit, conduit fittings, and seal fittings, expansion fittings and supports. This includes above grade as well as underground.
Q. Size, furnish, and install junction, pull and terminal boxes, in accordance to code requirements and as shown on the construction drawings.
R. Size, furnish and install all supports required for conduit installation, supports required for the installation of the equipment furnished by this Contractor and equipment furnished by others but installed by this Contractor.
S. Size and field cut the openings for conduits passing through building walls and/or floors.
Close and seal all openings after conduits have been installed and/or removed. Closing shall be compatible with, or of the same material as wall and/or floor.
T. Furnish and install permanent "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE" warning signs for the outdoor and indoor switchgear, all unit substations, motor control centers, power distribution panels, and on all doors of all electrical equipment rooms, fenced yards, etc. 560
22-12479 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK 260000 - 6 of 6
U. Furnish and install markers indicating voltage levels (e.g., 12.47 KV, 277/480V, 120/208V, etc.) for all of the electrical equipment such as motor control centers, local lighting panels, lighting transformers, power panels, switchboards, etc....
V. Furnish and install new nameplates per specifications on new motor control centers, motors and on all local control stations, control panels, disconnect switches, push button stations, instrument devices, etc.
W. Furnish and install wire tags in accordance with the specifications indicating wire number as shown on electrical schematics, one line, three line diagrams and specifications.
X. Furnish, install and connect all power, control and instrumentation cable, including all necessary cable lugs, connectors and terminations.
Y. Perform all testing per the Specifications (including generator cables) and report to Owner's field representative in a timely manner so as not to impede the scheduled completion of the Contract.
Z. Furnish all material, labor and testing equipment necessary to check out and test the complete power distribution, control and pneumatic systems for all process and utility equipment in strict accordance with specifications. This shall include check out/start up of systems and/or equipment as directed by Owner.
AA. Prime paint all uncoated carbon steel items furnished by Contractor.
BB. Energize low voltage services after testing equipment and wiring in accordance with manufacturer instructions and specifications.
CC. Provide four ¾” 10 ft copper ground rods, Cadweld the ground rods to the bare copper #4/0 ground ring. Install a ground rod for each of the generators. Connect ground cable to existing grounding loop at the facility
DD. Provide a NEMA L5-30 extension cord to the electrical power circuit of each generator to maintain the battery charging circuits.
EE. Electrical contractor to coordinate with the utility and the plant personnel to schedule an outage to terminate cables at the main bus in the existing main switchboard.
PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 260000
561
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 1 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
SECTION 260100
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections shall form a part of this Section, with the same force and effect as though repeated here.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all of the following Sections of Divisions 26-28 of
these Specifications and shall be considered a part of these Sections.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work and materials shall fully comply with current rules and regulations of all applicable codes. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications shall be interpreted as to permit any work not in compliance with these codes. Where work is detailed and/or specified to a more restrictive standard or higher requirement, that standard or requirement shall govern such work.
Applicable codes include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. California Code of Regulations (CCR)
a. Title 8, Industrial Relations
b. Title 17, Public Health
c. Title 24, Building Standards
2. 2019 California Building Code.
3. 2019 California Fire Code.
4. 2019 California Electrical Code.
5. Local Codes.
B. All electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction), shall meet their requirements, shall bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is regularly furnished by that agency, and shall be marked for intended use.
1.4 PERMITS, FEES AND TAXES
A. The Contractor shall secure all necessary permits and pay all required fees and taxes. He shall notify the proper authorities and have the work inspected and tested as required by jurisdictional requirements, pay all charges in connection therewith, and shall present 562
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 2 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
to the Owner properly signed certificates of inspection. Acceptance of the work will not be considered until such certificates have been delivered.
B. The Owner shall pay all utility company charges related to the new services. This shall include any required street lighting charges.
1.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall fulfill utility requirements for and pay all one-time and monthly charges for temporary construction utility usage.
B. There is no existing onsite power available to the Contractor for construction. The Contractor shall schedule his work such that the Medium and Low Voltage Electrical work is completed prior to needing onsite electrical power for jobsite trailers and/or construction equipment. The Contractor shall then use the Medium and Low Voltage power distribution system to provide construction power. The Contractor shall supply any supplemental temporary facilities required to provide construction power to the site (i.e. transformers, panels, outlet boxes).
1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and existing buildings, compare them with Drawings and Specifications, and shall have satisfied himself as to the conditions to be encountered during the performance of the work. No subsequent allowance shall be made on his behalf for any additional expense he may incur due to failure or neglect of Contractor to examine site and to include existing conditions in bid.
B. Any work done as an addition, expansion, or remodel of an existing system shall be compatible with that system.
C. The Contractor shall examine all record drawings made available by the Owner to locate existing underground systems, utilities, conduits, and pipes prior to installing the electrical distribution system. The Contractor shall also examine the site for possible locations of sprinkler pipes. Any damage done to the existing systems during the course of the electrical work, whose locations could be reasonably determined, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and the utility or agency involved, at the expense of the Contractor.
1.7 CONDUCT OF THE WORK
A. The Contractor shall maintain on the job a competent foreman or a superintendent at all times to superintend the Work.
1.8 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Engineer’s decision will be final on interpretation of the Drawings and Specifications.
Whenever the words “AS MAY BE DIRECTED”, “SUITABLE”, or “APPROVED EQUAL”, or other words of similar intent and meaning are used, implying that judgment is to be exercised, it is understood that it is in reference to the judgement of the Engineer. 563
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 3 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. See Specification Section 013300, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, for additional information and requirements.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. In addition to the provisions of Specification Section 013300, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, all Shop Drawings and Product Data shall comply with the following requirements:
a. The Contractor shall submit for review, complete sets of Shop Drawings and Product Data brochures for materials and equipment as required by each section of the Specifications.
b. All Shop Drawings and Product Data shall be submitted at one time in a neat and orderly fashion in a suitable binder with a Title Sheet including Project, Engineer and Contractor, Table of Contents, and indexed tabs dividing each group of materials or item of equipment. The Specification paragraph number for which they are proposed shall identify all items. The mark number as indicated on Drawings shall also identify all equipment and fixtures. c. Shop Drawings and Product Data submittal shall include manufacturer’s name and catalog numbers, dimensions, loads, and all other characteristics and accessories as listed in the Specifications or on the Drawings. All loads, characteristics, and accessories called for in the Specifications or on the Drawings shall be highlighted, circled or underlined on the Shop Drawings and Product Data. Descriptive literature shall be current factory brochures and submittal sheets.
d. FAX submittals are not acceptable.
e. Material or equipment shall not be ordered or installed until the Engineer processes the written review. Any item omitted from the submittal shall be provided as specified without substitution.
f. Prior to submission of the Shop Drawings and Project Data, Contractor shall review and certify that they meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. g. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required each time Shop Drawings and/or Product Data are submitted or resubmitted for review. The Contractor shall consider this time when scheduling a submittal date.
C. Submittal Review
1. Submittals will be reviewed for general conformance with the design concept, but this review does not guarantee quantity shown, nor does it supersede the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all materials, equipment and installation in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
2. The Contractor shall agree that Shop Drawings and Product Data submittals processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders and that the purpose of Shop Drawings and Product Data submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept. The Contractor demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. 564
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 4 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
3. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors, but the overlooking of others, does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error or in conflict with Contract Documents. The Contractor shall agree that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between Shop Drawings and Design Drawings and Specifications are discovered either prior to or after Shop Drawing submittals are processed by the Engineer, the Design Drawings and Specifications shall control and shall be followed.
4. If a resubmittal is required, submit a complete copy of the Engineer’s review letter requiring such with the resubmittal.
D. Substitutions
1. See Specification Section 012500, SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, for additional information and requirements.
2. In addition to the provisions of Specification Section 012500, SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, Substitutions shall comply with the following requirements:
a. Manufacturers, model numbers and other pertinent information listed in the Specifications or on the Drawings are intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor may submit equivalent compatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers for review, as long as the minimum standards are met. b. Calculations and other detailed data indicating how the item was selected shall be included for items that are not specified. Data must be complete enough to permit detailed comparison of every significant feature, function, performance, and quality characteristic that is specified, scheduled or detailed. The comparison must prove that the substituted item equals or exceeds the requirements of the specified item.
c. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility that substituted items or procedures will meet the Specification and job requirements and shall be responsible for the cost of redesign and modifications to the work caused by these items.
d. At the Engineer’s request, the Contractor shall furnish locations where equipment similar to the substituted equipment is installed and operating along with the user’s phone numbers and contact person. Satisfactory operation and service history will be considered in the acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution.
E. Record Drawings
1. See Specification Section 017839, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS, for additional information and requirements.
2. In addition to the provisions of Specification Section 017839, PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS, Record Drawings shall comply with the following requirements:
a. At the beginning of the Project, one print of each applicable Drawing will be issued to the Contractor specifically for use in preparing Record Drawings. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall maintain a record of all deviations in the work from that indicated on the Drawings. Final locations of all underground work shall be recorded by depth from finished grade and by offset distance from permanent surface structures,
565
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 5 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
e.g. building, curbs, walks. The original Drawings will be made available to the Contractor, from which he shall have made, a set of reproducible Drawings.
The Contractor shall then transfer the changes, notations, etc. from the marked-up prints to the reproducible Drawings. The Record Drawings (marked-up prints and reproducibles) shall be submitted to the Engineer for review, after first securing the Inspector’s verification by signature.
F. Operations and Maintenance Instructions
1. See Specification Section 017823, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, for additional information and requirements.
2. In addition to the provisions of Specification Section 017823, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Operations and Maintenance Instructions shall comply with the following requirements:
a. Three copies of Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Wiring Diagrams for all equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer. All instructions shall be clearly identified by marking them with the same designation as the equipment item to which they apply (e.g. UPS-1). All Wiring Diagrams shall agree with reviewed Shop Drawings and indicate the exact field installation. b. All instructions shall be submitted at the same time and shall be bound in a suitable binder with tabs dividing each type of equipment (e.g. MCC, UPS, etc.). Each binder shall be labeled indicating “Operating and Maintenance Instructions, Project Title, Contractor, Date” and shall have a Table of Contents listing all items included.
c. The Contractor shall verbally instruct the Owner’s maintenance staff in the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. The Engineer’s office shall be notified 48 hours prior to this meeting. d. The Contractor shall prepare a letter indicating that all Operation and Maintenance Instructions (printed and verbal) have been given to the Owner, to the Owner’s satisfaction. This letter shall be acknowledged (signed) by the Owner and submitted to the Engineer.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. See Specification Section 013113, PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION, for additional information and requirements.
B. Electrical Drawings are essentially diagrammatic, unless specifically dimensioned. Some work may be shown offset for clarity. The actual locations of all materials, conduits, fixtures, supports, etc. shall be carefully planned prior to installation of any work in order to avoid all interferences with each other, or with architectural, civil, mechanical, plumbing, structural or other elements.
C. While the size and location of equipment are shown to scale wherever possible, all dimensions and conduit/conductor data shall be verified in the field.
D. Where the work requires connections to be made to equipment furnished and set in place by others, the Contractor shall obtain exact rough-in dimensions from the manufacturer of such equipment and he shall install the connections in a neat and workmanlike manner. 566
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 6 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
E. If discrepancies are discovered between Drawings and Specifications requirements, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
F. All conflicts shall be called to the attention of the Architect and the Engineer prior to the installation of any work or the ordering of any equipment.
G. No work shall be prefabricated or installed prior to this coordination. No additional compensation will be considered to the Contractor for any prefabrication or installation performed prior to this coordination.
1.11 SCHEDULING
A. All work shall be scheduled subject to the review of the Architect, Engineer and the Owner. No work shall interfere with the operation of the existing facilities on or adjacent to the site. The Contractor shall have at all times, as conditions permit, a sufficient force of workmen and quantity of materials to install the work for which contracted, as rapidly as possible consistent with good work, and shall cause no delay to other Contractors engaged upon this project or to the Owner.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. See Specification Section 017836, WARRANTIES, for additional information and requirements.
B. Guarantee shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. These Specifications may extend the period of the guarantee for certain items. Where such extension are called for, or where items are normally provided with guarantee periods in excess of that called for in the General Conditions, the Certificate of Guarantee shall be furnished to the Owner through the Engineer.
C. Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a written guarantee on all workmanship, materials and equipment for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. Any work found to be faulty during that period of time shall be corrected at once, upon written notification, at the expense of the Contractor. This shall include repair or replacement of the premises that may be damaged as a result of faulty work and materials furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise noted.
B. Materials and equipment of a given type shall be by the same manufacturer.
C. Materials and equipment shall be covered or otherwise protected during construction as required to maintain the material and equipment in new factory condition until project acceptance. Upon completion of work and prior to final inspection, Contractor shall thoroughly clean all exposed fixtures, trim and equipment, and shall leave the entire installation in neat, clean, and useable condition. Materials and equipment shall be free of 567
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 7 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
dents, scratches, marks, shipping tags, and all defacing features at time of project acceptance.
D. The Contractor shall order materials and equipment in a timely manner to prevent any delay in the construction schedule, and he shall bear any penalty by vendors to meet schedules.
E. Verify all dimensional information to ensure proper clearance for installation of equipment.
Check all materials and equipment after arrival on the jobsite and verify compliance with the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. The Contractor shall protect existing electrical equipment and installations that are not indicated to be removed. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality.
B. Exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, shall be removed in their entirety.
C. Buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, shall be cut 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction and removed in its entirety. Raceways abandoned in place shall be capped and disturbed surfaces shall be patched to match existing finish.
D. Demolished material shall be removed from Project site.
E. Components indicated for relocation shall be removed, stored, cleaned, reinstalled, reconnected, and made operational.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting and drilling, or other work, required to provide openings in walls, ceilings, floors, footings, foundations or other structures necessary to accomplish work under this Specification Division. The cutting shall be performed by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
B. Cutting or coring shall not impair the strength of the structure. Any damage resulting from this work shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Wherever possible, work shall be done in a concealed and neat workmanlike manner requiring the least amount of cutting of studs, plates and woodwork. Such cutting or notching is allowed only after consultation with and by permission of the Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to accurately match adjacent undisturbed new or existing structures and surfaces and shall install new fireproofing where existing fire-stopping has been disturbed. The repair and refinishing of materials and other surfaces shall be by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. 568
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 8 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
E. All cuts are to be clean with no chipping. Where chipping occurs as a result of work in a cut area, a new clean cut shall be made immediately prior to patching.
3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. The Contractor shall provide excavation and backfilling required to complete work detailed in the Drawings and Specifications. Unless otherwise noted, minimum earth cover above top of conduit outside building walls shall be 24”, not including base and paving in paved areas.
B. The location of all underground facilities shall be verified with the Owner and utility companies prior to the commencement of any excavation.
C. The Contractor shall contact Underground Service Alert (USA), at 1-800-642-2444, ten (10) days prior to doing any excavation or trenching, and shall advise USA of the work schedule and comply with their requirements.
D. The Contractor shall notify the Owner 72 hours prior to any excavation.
E. Provide all shoring required by site conditions. Where over-excavation occurs, provide compacted sand backfill. Where groundwater is encountered, remove to keep excavation dry, using well points and pumps as required.
F. The conduit shall be laid on firm soil cut true and even to afford bearing for the full length of the barrel of the conduit.
G. When the bottom uncovered at sub-grade is soft and, in the opinion of the Engineer, cannot support the conduit, a further depth shall be excavated and refilled to conduit foundation grade as required by the Engineer.
H. Backfill (where concrete encasement is not required):
1. Material 3” below, 3” around, and to 6” above conduit shall be sand. Place carefully around and on top of conduit, taking care not to disturb conduit. Consolidate with vibrator.
2. Material from 6” Above Conduit to Grade shall be sandy or silty loam, free of lumps, laid in 6” layers, uniformly mixed to proper moisture and compacted to required density.
If backfill is determined to be suitable and required compaction is demonstrated by laboratory test, water compaction in 6” layers may be used, subject to review by Engineer.
I. No excavation below the level of, or adjacent to, foundations of footings shall be made except in a manner approved by the Structural Engineer.
J. Compaction
1. Prior to compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. Under Structures, Building Slabs, Walkways, and Steps , compact top 6” of sub- grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 92% maximum relative 569
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 9 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
compaction. Compact upper 2’ of backfill in utility trenches or other excavations to 92% minimum relative compaction.
3. In Lawns and Unpaved Areas , compact top 6” of sub-grade material to 85% relative compaction.
4. Under Pavement, compact top 8” of sub-grade immediately beneath the base course at 95% minimum relative compaction.
3.4 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASES
A. The Contractor shall provide a concrete equipment base for each piece of electrical equipment required to have a base as shown in the Drawings, Notes and Details.
B. Concrete equipment bases shall be 6” high concrete, 3500PSI strength, unless otherwise noted.
Base shall extend 6” beyond the largest dimensions of the equipment, unless otherwise noted.
The top edge of the base shall have a ¾” chamfer. The base shall have #4 reinforcing bars at 12” on center, each way, located at the mid-depth of the base.
C. If the base is not poured at the same time as the floor slab with base rebar tied to floor rebar, the base shall be anchored to the floor slab per the following criteria:
1. Drill 1” diameter, 4” deep hole in floor.
2. Fill hole with Simpson SET Epoxy then insert 8” long, #4 rebar into hole. Tie this rebar to that required for the equipment base.
3. Provide a minimum of 4 of these anchors per base but no more than 4 feet apart in either direction.
4. Anchor points shall be 12” from the edge of the base.
D. Concrete anchors shall be steel bolts with expansion anchors requiring a drilled hole. Powder- driven anchors are not acceptable. Minimum concrete embedment shall be 4.5 diameters but not less than manufacturer’s requirements for minimum strength. Minimum spacing shall be 10 diameters center-to-center and 5 diameters center to edge of concrete but not less than manufacturer’s requirements for minimum strength. Maximum allowable stresses for tension and shear shall be 80% of the ICC-ES test report values.
E. Where applicable, concrete structures shall be submitted to the serving utility for their approval prior to installation.
F. Concrete bases for pole mounted lighting fixtures shall be 3500PSI strength, unless otherwise noted, and shall have vertical reinforcing bars with horizontal reinforcing bar ties as detailed on the drawings. The top edge of the concrete base shall have a 1” chamfer.
3.5 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING
A. Equipment Anchorage
1. All electrical equipment and components shall be anchored and installed per the details on the DSA
approved construction documents. Where no detail is indicated, the following components shall be anchored or braced to meet the 570
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 10 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
force and displacements requirements prescribed in the 2019 CBC, Sections 1617A.1.18 through 1617A.1.26. and ASCE 7-16 Chapter 13, 26, and 30:
a. All permanent equipment and components
b. Temporary or movable equipment that is permanently attached (e.g. hard wired) to building utility electrical service.
c. Movable equipment which is stationed in one place for more than 8 hours and heavier than 400 pounds are required to be anchored with temporary attachments.
2. The attachment of the following electrical components shall be positively attached to the structure, but need not be detailed on the plans. These components shall have flexible connections provided between the components and associated conduit. a. Components weighting less than 400 pounds and have a center of mass located 4 feet or less above the adjacent floor or roof level that directly support the components.
b. Components weighting less than 20 pounds, or in the case of distributed systems, less than 5 pounds per foot, which are suspended from a roof or floor or hung from a wall.
For those elements that do not require details on the approved drawings, the installation shall be subject to the approval of the Structural Engineer of Record. The project inspector will verify that all components and equipment have been anchored in accordance with above requirements.
B. Electrical Distribution System Bracing
1. Electrical distribution systems shall be braced to comply with the forces and displacements prescribed in ASCE 7-16 Section 13.3 as defined in ASCE 7-16 Section
13.6.7, 13.6.6, 13.6.5, and 2019 CBC, Sections 1617A.1.23, 1617A.1.24, 1617A.1.25, and 1617A.1.26.
2. The bracing and attachments to the structure shall be detailed on the approved drawings or they shall comply with one of the OSHPD Pre-Approvals (OPM#) as modified to satisfy anchorage requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 17.
3. Copies of the manual shall be available on the jobsite prior to the start of hanging and bracing of the electrical distribution systems.
4. The Structural Engineer of Record shall verify the adequacy of the structure to support the hanger and brace loads.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall, progressively and at completion of the job, thoroughly clean all of his work including outlets, fittings, and devices, and inspect exposed finishes. The Contractor shall remove all burrs, dirt, grease, paint spots, stains, labels, tags, rust, foreign material, and construction debris resulting from his work.
B. The Contractor shall protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
571
22-12479 GENERAL CONDITIONS 260100 - 11 of 11
FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
END OF SECTION 260100
572
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 1 of 28 SECTION 260500
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections shall form a part of this Section, with the same force and effect as though repeated here.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. See Section 260000
1.3 STANDARDS
A. NEMA 250 Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE PADS, PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES
A. At the Contractor’s option, he shall provide cast-in-place or pre-cast structures.
B. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials shall be as specified in Division 03 Section “Cast- in-Place Concrete”.
C. Concrete shall be 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place concrete”.
D. Weatherproof concrete pull boxes, junction boxes and telephone boxes shall be manufactured by Christy Concrete Products or equal. All boxes shall have lids marked “Power”, “Signal”, “Fiber Optic”, “Danger-High Voltage”, etc. and be traffic-rated per CalTrans drawing ES-8 minimum where pull box occurs in vehicular traffic areas.
2.2 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRC) shall meet ANSI C80.1, and be heavy wall, hot dipped galvanized inside and out, with threaded ends, for use with threaded type fittings. 573
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 2 of 28 B. Galvanized intermediate metallic conduit (IMC) shall meet ANSI C80.6, be zinc-coated steel and have threaded fittings.
C. Galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall meet ANSI C80.3, and be continuous, seamless steel tubing, galvanized or sherardized on exterior, coated on interior with smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish or enamel, with steel set-screw, steel compression or die-cast compression type fittings. Provide concrete-tight type compression fittings where required and rain-tight wet location listed compression fittings for outdoor locations.
D. Rigid non-metallic conduit (RNC) shall meet NEMA TC 2, be Schedule 40 PVC, suitable for 90C, with solvent cemented type NEMA TC3 fittings.
E. Flexible metallic conduit (FMC) shall be single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked double- wrapped steel, hot dip galvanized inside and out forming smooth internal wiring channel, with steel, compression type fittings.
F. Liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit (LFMC) shall be same as FMC except with inert sunlight- resistant, mineral-oil-resistant watertight plastic outer jacket. Fittings shall be cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with one-piece brass grounding bushings threaded to interior of conduit. Spiral molded vinyl-sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and nylon- insulated throat.
G. All raceway fittings shall be specifically designed for the raceway type with which used.
2.3 SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAY
A. Surface Mounted Nonmetallic Raceways and system components shall be composed of U.L.
Listed materials and exhibit nonflammable self-extinguishing characteristics. Larger (2 and 3 channel non-metallic raceways) shall be UL Listed under File Nos. E90378 Guide RJTX and E90377 Guide RJYT, respectively. Raceways shall be tested to UL94V-0, or equivalent.
B. Surface Mounted Nonmetallic Raceway shall be a two-piece design with a base and snap-on cover(s). The raceway base shall accept either a single cover that spans the entire base or two individual covers which together cover the base and allow independent access to services.
C. Surface Mounted Nonmetallic Raceway shall be available with two or three wiring channels separated by integral barriers. One channel must be large enough to accept standard power and communication devices without restricting capacity of the adjacent channel. The raceway base and cover shall be manufactured of rigid PVC compound, available in ivory or white.
D. Device brackets shall be available for mounting standard devices in-line or offset from the raceway. A device bracket shall provide up to three single-gang openings at one location.
Faceplates shall match raceway and fit flush in the device plate. They shall be manufactured of rigid PVC compound.
E. The raceway manufacturer will provide a complete line of connectivity outlets and modular inserts for UTP, STP (150 ohm), fiber optic, coaxial and other cabling types with faceplates and bezels to facilitate mounting. A complete line of preprinted station and port 574
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 3 of 28 identification labels, snap-in icon buttons, as well as write-on station identification labels shall be available.
F. A complete line of full capacity corner elbows and tee fittings must be available to maintain a controlled 2" cable bend radius which meets the specifications for Fiber Optic and UTP/STP cabling and exceeds the TIA / EIA 569-A requirements for communications pathways. They shall be manufactured of a rigid PVC compound.
G. A full complement of fittings must be available including, but not limited to tees, entrance fittings, cover clips, and end caps. They shall be manufactured of a rigid PVC compound. The fittings shall have a matte texture, in ivory or white colors to match the base and cover. They shall overlap the cover and base to hide uneven cuts. All fittings shall be supplied with a base where applicable to eliminate mitering. Transition fittings shall be available to adapt to other raceways.
H. Surface Mounted Nonmetallic Raceway shall be multi-channel 5400 Series by the Wiremold Company, or equal.
2.4 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC)
A. Type MC Cable shall consist of 3 or more individually insulated 600V THHN/THWN conductors, an overall polypropylene cable assembly tape and an outer galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked armor.
B. Type MC Cable shall have as one of its conductors a separate full sized equipment grounding conductor as the armor is not considered an equipment grounding means.
C. Type MC Cable fittings shall be of the single screw clamp variety with steel or cast malleable iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats. Fittings shall be UL listed for use with MC cable type specified.
2.5 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC-PCS)
A. Type MC-PCS Cable shall consist of 3 or more individually insulated 600V THHN/THWN copper conductors not less than #12 AWG + 2 additional insulated 600V THHN/THWN #16 AWG copper conductors separately contained within a PVC jacket. All conductors shall be contained within an overall polypropylene cable assembly tape and an outer galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked armor.
B. Type MC-PCS Cable shall have as one of its conductors a separate full sized equipment grounding conductor as the armor is not considered an equipment grounding means.
C. Type MC-PCS Cable fittings shall be of the single screw clamp variety with steel or cast malleable iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats. Fittings shall be UL listed for use with MC cable type specified.
2.6 MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM
575
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 4 of 28 A. Modular wiring system shall consist of factory pre-assembled connectors and pre-wired cable assemblies to interface with lighting fixtures and lighting switches.
2.7 CONDUCTORS
A. All conductors shall be delivered to the site in their original unbroken packages, plainly marked or tagged with UL labels, size, type of wire, type of insulation, name of the manufacturing company and trade name of the wire.
B. All conductors shall be minimum of 98% conductivity soft drawn copper. Conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded type “THHN/THWN”, 600 Volt insulation. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper “THHN/THWN”, 600 Volt insulation.
C. Insulation shall be Thermoplastic Type rated at 75 degrees C. minimum.
2.8 PULL BOXES AND WIREWAYS
A. Pullboxes and Enclosures for outdoor use shall be NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise noted.
B. Pullboxes and Enclosures for indoor use shall be NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise noted.
C. Wireways shall be constructed in accordance with UL 870 for wireways, auxiliary gutters and associated fittings. Every component including lengths, connectors and fittings shall be UL Listed.
D. Wireways and auxiliary gutters shall have continuous removable cover secured with screws and keyhole slots. Hinged cover shall be provided where installed above suspended ceiling.
E. Fabricated sheet steel pull boxes shall be installed only in dry, protected locations and shall be furnished with knockouts and removable screw cover. Box shall be finished with one coat of zinc chromate and a coat of primer sealer and where exposed to public view shall be painted to match the surrounding surface.
F. Weatherproof sheet steel pull boxes shall be fabricated of code gauge galvanized sheet steel with two coats of rust resistant finish and shall be furnished with gasket and made completely weathertight.
2.9 WIRING DEVICES AND MATERIALS
A. Outlet Boxes shall meet NEMA OS1 and be galvanized code gauge steel. Boxes in masonry shall be square cornered. Boxes exposed to weather or in wet locations shall be Type FD cast metal with external threaded hubs and gasketed cover and shall meet NEMA FB1.
B. Outlet box extensions shall be U.L. listed and shall be attached to box with threaded metal screws. “Flash Guards” are not permitted to be used as box extensions. 576
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 5 of 28 C. Approved manufacturers of metal boxes are Circle AW, Crouse-Hinds, Steel City or equal.
D. A/C Snap Switches:
1. 120/277 Volt Switches shall be quiet, fast make, fast break design, toggle handle, with totally enclosed case, rated 20 ampere, heavy duty specification grade. Provide matching two pole, 3-way, 4-way, and key switches as required.
2. A/C snap switches served by emergency power circuits shall be red.
3. A/C snap switches shall be Hubbell or Leviton 1221 series.
E. Receptacles:
1. Duplex Receptacles:
a. Duplex Receptacles shall be tamper-resistant, full gang size, polarized duplex, parallel blade, U-grounding slot, specification grade, rated at 20 amperes, 125 volts and designed for split feed service.
b. Receptacles served by normal power circuits shall be ivory, grey, white or brown, dependent upon room wall finish and as direct by Architect.
Receptacles served by emergency power circuits shall be red. c. Duplex receptacles shall be Hubbell HBL5362WTR series, or equivalent.
2. GFCI Receptacles:
a. GFCI receptacles shall be weather-resistant, tamper-resistant, duplex, feed- through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Units shall be designed for installation in a 2-3/4-inch deep outlet box without an adapter.
b. Duplex GFCI receptacles shall be Hubbell #GFTWRST20W series, or equivalent to match regular duplex receptacles.
3. TVSS Receptacles:
a. TVSS Receptacles shall be Decora Plus duplex, straight blade, industrial grade, self-grounding, surge protected with indicator light, rated at 20 amperes, 125-volts.
b. TVSS Receptacles shall have integral TVSS with line-to-ground, line-to-neutral, and neutral-to-ground surge protection, with a nominal clamp level rating of 500 volts and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 140 J line to neutral, and 70 J line to ground and neutral to ground. c. TVSS Receptacles shall be Hubbell HBL5362WSA series, or equivalent.
4. Required California Energy Code Controlled Receptacles: Provide one controlled duplex receptacle within 6-feet of each uncontrolled receptacle in all private offices, open office areas, reception lobbies, conference rooms, kitchenettes in office spaces and copy rooms as required by 2019 California Energy Code Section 130.5(d).
Controlled receptacles shall be permanently factory marked with the symbol shown in 2019 CEC Figure 406.3(E) and the
577
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 6 of 28 word “controlled”. Adhesive labels shall not be permitted in lieu of permanent factory marking. Controlled receptacles shall be tamper-resistant Hubbell HBL5362C2WHITR series or equivalent.
5. Required Weather-Resistant Receptacles: All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt non-locking type receptacles located outdoors and in damp and wet locations shall be listed weather-resistant type.
6. Required Tamper-Resistant Receptacles: Tamper resistant receptacles shall be provided in the following areas where required by CEC 406.12:
a. Dwelling units;
b. Guest rooms and guest suites;
c. Child care facilities;
d. Preschool and elementary school education facilities; e. Business offices, corridors, waiting rooms and the like in clinics, medical and dental offices and outpatient facilities;
f. Subset of assembly occupancies described in CEC 518.2 to include places of waiting transportation, gymnasiums, skating rinks and auditoriums; g. Dormitories;
7. Receptacles for Owner-furnished equipment shall match that equipment’s plug configuration.
8. Other Receptacles: Other receptacles shall match the plug configuration and ratings required for the utilization equipment that is served.
F. Device cover plates shall be provided and installed at all wiring devices, switches, outlets, and similar applications, and shall be as directed by architect. Pull boxes and junction boxes to which no fixture is to be attached shall be fitted with blank cover plates painted to match surrounding.
All cover plates installed on rated walls shall be brushed stainless steel. Cover plates for receptacles in wet locations shall have an enclosure that is weatherproof whether or not the attachment plug cap is inserted and shall be identified as “extra-duty”. Cover plates installed at switches used for lighting control in all multiple occupant restrooms, all hallways and corridors, and in other locations where lockable cover plates are indicated on the Drawings shall be the dustproof locking stainless steel cover Legrand model WP26-L.
2.10 TERMINAL CABINETS AND CLOSETS
A. Cabinets and fronts shall be in accordance with NEMA Standard Publication No. PB1-1971 and UL Standards No. 67. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, brushed stainless steel, cylinder tumbler-type locks with catches and spring loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All locks shall be keyed like the panel board locks. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps that shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with the door in the locked position. A frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the
578
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 7 of 28 inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge full finished steel with rust inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish.
2.11 PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish panelboards shown on plans and described herein. All cans shall be a minimum of 20” wide and 5.75” deep unless otherwise shown. They shall be totally flat or equal with flush keyed locks.
B. Fronts shall be cold rolled sheet steel painted with ANSI 61 gray enamel over a rust inhibitor.
They shall be equipped with door, flush hinges, and flush proper cylinder tumbler lock, metal circuit card holder, and quarter turn adjustable trim clamps. Panel locks shall be keyed alike.
C. Panel shall consist of reinforced corrosion resistant galvanized sheet steel frame with silver plated copper bus bars and circuit breakers properly supported to prevent vibration breakage in handling. All terminals shall be solderless type suitable for specified conductors of size indicated.
D. Neutral bus shall be full size. Neutral bus shall be 200% rated when supplied from a double neutral feeder. Provide an equipment ground bus in each panelboard. In addition to the equipment ground bus, provide an isolated ground bus when supplied from a feeder which includes an isolated grounding conductor.
E. Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt-on, and fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. All 2-pole and 3-pole breakers shall have common trips.
F. Branch panelboards and overcurrent protection devices shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 10,000 RMS symmetrical AIC (120/208V).
G. Distribution panelboards and overcurrent protection devices shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 42,000 RMS symmetrical AIC (120/208V).
H. All Panelboards shall be fully rated as shown on Drawings; series-rating shall not be allowed.
I. Panelboards shall bear an Arc-Flash Hazard Warning label in accordance with CEC Article 110.16.
J.Breakers for switching lights shall be type SWD, rated for switching duty. Breakers for mechanical equipment shall be HACR type.
K. All spaces shall have hardware.
2.12 DISCONNECTING DEVICES
A. Disconnecting devices shall be provided as shown and/or as required by CEC. 579
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 8 of 28 B. Motor-rated switches shall be toggle-type, quick make-quick break, rated 2 HP, 250 VAC, with number of poles as required. They shall be equipped with overload heaters rated for overload protection of loads controlled.
C. Motor-rated switches shall be flush-mounted adjacent to load controlled. Where flush mounting is not possible, switches shall be surface mounted in NEMA enclosure suitable for environment in which installed.
D. Disconnect switches shall be 250V or 600V class, rated heavy-duty, horsepower rated, quick- make, quick-break, dead-front type and provided with proper number of poles.
E. Disconnect Switches shall be self contained in a NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure (NEMA 3R where installed outdoors) and externally operable from the front.
F. Fusible disconnect switches shall be equipped with rejection type clips suitable for UL Class R fuses up to 600A and suitable for UL Class L fuses above 600A. Fuse interrupting rating shall be 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
G. Circuit breakers utilized as disconnecting devices shall comply with the requirements stated in other articles of this section and CEC.
2.13 FUSES
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:
1. Bussman
2. Gould Shawmut
3. Littlefuse.
B. Fuses 600 amperes and below shall be UL Class RK1, 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting rating.
C. Fuses 601 amperes through 4000 amperes shall be UL Class L, 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting rating.
2.14 MAGNETIC STARTERS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. All magnetic starters for mechanical equipment shall be furnished with integral 120VAC control transformers, sized to handle the starter and all controls connected to it – pilots, EP valves, etc.
B. All magnetic starters for mechanical equipment shall be provided with auxiliary contacts as required for interlock to EMS System. An allowance of at least one auxiliary contact per starter shall be estimated.
2.15 SUPPORTING DEVICES
580
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 9 of 28 A. Supporting devices shall be constructed of cold-formed steel, with a corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Metal items for use outdoors or in damp locations shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-steel channel supports shall have flanged edges turned toward the web, and 9/16-inch diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches on center, in the web.
1. Channel thickness shall be selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and accessories shall be products of the same manufacturer as the channel supports.
D. Raceway and cable supports shall be manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.
E. Pipe sleeves shall be ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, with plain ends.
F. Cable supports for vertical conduit shall be a factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body shall be constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
G. Concrete anchors shall be steel bolts with expansion anchors requiring a drilled hole. Powder driven anchors are not acceptable.
H. Toggle bolts shall be all-steel springhead type.
2.16 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification devices shall be a single type of product for each application category. Colors shall be as prescribed by ANSI A13.1, CEC, and these Specifications.
B. Raceway and cable labels shall comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
1. Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves shall be a flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl labels shall have a legend, over-laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.
3. Color shall be black letters on orange background.
4. Legend shall indicate voltage.
C. Self-adhesive colored marking tape for raceways, wires and cables shall be vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick.
581
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 10 of 28 D. Underground Warning Tape shall be vinyl tape, compounded for permanent direct-burial service, not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, embedded with a continuous metallic strip or core, brightly-colored, continuously-printed with a legend that indicates the type of underground line.
E. Tape markers for wire shall be vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.
F. Color-coding cable ties shall be made of Type 6/6 nylon, be self-locking type and of colors to suit coding scheme.
G. Engraved plastic labels, signs and instruction plates shall be made from black (or red as noted) Bakelite laminate engraving stock with a white core, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
It shall have a minimum thickness of 1/16-inch for signs up to 20 sq. in. and a minimum thickness of 1/8-inch for larger sizes.
H. Interior Warning and Caution signs shall comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145 and shall be preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.
I. Exterior Warning and Caution signs shall comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145 and shall be weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396- inch, galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. They shall be equipped with 1/4-inch grommets in each corner for mounting.
J.Fasteners for nameplates and signs shall be self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless- steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
K. Arc-Flash Hazard Warning labels shall be provided at electrical equipment such as switchboards and panelboards in accordance with CEC 110.16.
L. Circuit Identification – A typewritten circuit directory shall be provided at each panelboard and switchboard in accordance with CEC Article 408.4(A). The Contractor shall develop and prepare the circuit identification description based on the as-built condition.
M. Source of Supply Identification – All switchboards, panelboards and transformers shall have a typewritten label applied indicating the device or equipment where the power supply originates per CEC Article 408.4(B).
2.17 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY’S ELECTRICITY METERING A. Current-transformer cabinets shall comply with requirements of the governing electrical power utility company.
B. Meter sockets shall comply with requirements of the governing electrical power utility company.
2.18 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY OWNER
582
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 11 of 28 A. Meter shall be an electronic kilowatt-hour measuring type to record electricity used.
1. Kilowatt-hour display shall be digital liquid crystal.
2. Enclosure shall be a NEMA 250,
[ Type 1 ] [ Type 3R ] , minimum, with hasp for
padlocking or sealing.
3. Memory backup shall be self-contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of 72 hours, minimum.
4. Sensors shall be [Split] [ Solid] core, current-sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum range and accuracy for the ratings of the circuits indicated for this application.
5. Nationally recognized testing laboratory shall certify meter accuracy meets [ANSI C12.1]
[ANSI C12.16] specifications.
B. Meter shall be an electronic kilowatt-hour/demand measuring type to record electricity used and highest peak demand over a time period. Meter shall be designed for use on the type and rating of circuit indicated for its application.
1. Kilowatt-hour display shall be digital liquid crystal.
2. Kilowatt-demand display shall be a digital, liquid-crystal type to register highest peak demand.
3. Enclosure shall be a NEMA 250,
[Type 1] [Type 3R], minimum, with hasp for padlocking
or sealing.
4. Memory backup shall be self-contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of 72 hours, minimum.
5. Sensors shall be [Split] [ Solid] core, current-sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum range and accuracy for the ratings of the circuits indicated for this application.
6. Nationally recognized testing laboratory shall certify meter accuracy meets [ANSI C12.1]
[ANSI C12.16] specifications.
7. Demand Signal Communication Interface shall match signal to building automation system input that conveys data on instantaneous/integrated demand level measured by meter used for load switching to control demand.
C. Current-transformer cabinets shall be listed or recommended by metering equipment manufacturer for use with sensors indicated.
D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following metering equipment manufacturers:
1. E-MON Corporation.
2. National Meter Industries, Inc.
3. Osaki Meter Sales, Inc.
583
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 12 of 28
2.19 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. Touch-up paint shall be equipment manufacturer’s paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B. Touch-up paint on galvanized surfaces shall be zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. All material, equipment, devices, etc., shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the particular item. The Contractor shall be responsible for all installations contrary to the manufacturer’s recommendations. The Contractor shall make all necessary changes and revisions to achieve such compliance. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be delivered to and maintained at the job site throughout the construction of the project.
B. The layout and installation of electrical work shall be coordinated with the overall construction schedule to prevent delay in completion of the project.
C. Dimensions and information regarding accurate locations of equipment and structural limitations and finish shall be verified with other sections.
D. The drawings do not show all raceway, wiring, offsets, bends, special fittings, junction or pull boxes necessary to meet job conditions. Items not shown as indicated, where are clearly necessary for proper operation or installation of systems shown, shall be provided as required, at no increase in contract price.
E. Materials and Components shall be installed level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Electrical equipment, outlets, junctions and pull boxes shall be installed in accessible locations, avoiding obstructions, preserving maximum headroom, and keeping openings and passageways clear.
G. Equipment shall be installed to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. It shall be connected for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Minor adjustments in the locations of equipment shall be made where necessary providing such adjustments do not adversely affect function of the equipment. Major adjustments for the location of equipment shall be previously approved and detailed on the Record Drawings.
H. Right of Way shall be given to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
584
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 13 of 28 A. Wiremold 5500 Series three-channel surface non-metallic raceway shall be used within corridors to distribute data and low voltage system signals throughout the building.
B. Wiremold 5400 Series two-channel surface non-metallic raceways shall be used within classrooms to distribute power and data to plug outlets and data receptacles.
C. Wiremold 800 Series wiremold surface non-metallic raceway shall be used within classrooms to extend circuiting for the fire alarm system from the two-channel surface non-metallic raceway to the location of the notification appliance.
D. Wiremold 5000 Series surface non-metallic raceway shall be used for horizontal runs @ 18” A.F.F. within offices to distribute power and data to plug outlets and data receptacles.
E. A complete system of surface non-metallic raceways including all fittings and covers shall be installed as required to continuously route raceways around corners, transition between and route down walls, and provide all device terminations. Retaining clips shall be installed such that wiring and cabling shall be retained within the raceway when the cover is removed. All raceway fittings shall be specifically designed for the raceway type with which used. Raceways shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
F. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC) may be used in all locations. Where installed in direct contact with earth, conduit shall be wrapped with two layers of half-lapped 10-mil PVC tape for a total thickness of 40-mil or have a factory applied 40-mil PVC coating.
G. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC) shall be used where exposed to physical damage, indoors where exposed to moisture, in exposed outdoor installations, in systems higher than 600 volts, and where required by code.
H. Galvanized Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) may be used in indoor locations not in direct contact with earth.
I. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) may be used in dry indoor locations according to the following criteria:
1. It is not subject to physical damage.
2. It is not in direct contact with earth.
3. It is not in concrete slabs.
4. It is not in a hazardous area.
J.Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC) Schedule 40 PVC may be used underground or below concrete slabs on grade. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC) Schedule 80 PVC may be used to pass through concrete slabs. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC) may be used in compliance with utility company requirements for utility service conduits. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC) shall not be installed above grade or above finished floor level.
K. Liquid-tight Flexible Metallic Conduit (LFMC) may be used in all locations to make final connections to motors, transformers, or other mechanical equipment (not to exceed 24 inches in length) or lighting fixtures (not to exceed 72 inches in length). Where specifically approved by the Engineer, LFMC may be used to facilitate wiring in tight locations or in other conditions that make the use of other conduit impracticable.
585
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 14 of 28 L. Flexible Metallic Conduit (FMC) may be used in dry locations to make final connections to motors, transformers, or other mechanical equipment (not to exceed 24 inches in length) or lighting fixtures (not to exceed 72 inches in length). Where specifically approved by the Engineer, FMC may be used to facilitate wiring in tight locations or in other conditions that make the use of other conduit impracticable.
3.3 RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Expansion joints shall be provided at building expansion joints or as required due to length of run or difference in temperatures.
2. All fittings that are exposed or in damp areas shall have sealing glands and proper gasket.
3. In general, all conduits shall be sloping to drain. Bends that place a trap in a conduit shall be avoided. Provided drip fitting as required. Dux-Seal high ends of all underground raceways.
4. All conduit runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet.
Conduit size or type shall not be changed between outlets.
5. All empty raceways shall be equipped with pull lines, capped and labeled. Pull lines shall be 3/16” polypropylene, No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 24 inches of slack with identification tag at each end of the pull wire.
6. Minimum size of any conduit for lighting, power and signal shall be ¾” conduit unless shown otherwise.
7. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering. Immediately prior to installation of conductors, conduit shall be blown and swept free of foreign materials.
All conduit stubs for future, both above and below grade, shall be capped. Run conduits for spare panelboard circuits to attic or accessible spaces.
8. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for exposed parallel raceways.
10. There shall be no more than the equivalent of four quarter bends (360-degrees total) between pull points such as pull boxes, outlet boxes or conduit bodies, in one run of conduit.
11. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
12. Conduits shall be securely fastened to building structure at intervals not greater than ten feet.
586
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 15 of 28
13. Conduit shall be square cut and reamed if required to full size, with thread full cut and true.
14. Conduits shall be jointed by approved couplings with ends of conduits tightly butted.
Non-insulating compound shall be used in making up joints below grade or inside on grade to insure a watertight system.
15. Conduit connections to outlet boxes or cabinets shall be made with approved connectors, using locknuts and insulated throat bushings.
16. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
17. Contractor shall provide rubber grommets to fasten galvanized conduit to exterior structures made of dissimilar metals at all exterior locations to prevent galvanic corrosion.
18. Contractor shall provide rubber grommets to fasten galvanized conduit to supports which are also used by other systems utilizing piping of dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic corrosion.
B. Interior
1. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
2. All concealed conduits shall be installed in as direct a line as possible between outlets.
No more than four quarter bends, or their equivalent, will be allowed between outlets.
Feeder conduits shall follow arrangement shown on plans unless a change is authorized. Branch circuit conduits shall, in general, follow arrangement as shown as far as structural conditions permit. All exposed runs shall parallel buildings, walls, or partitions, and be supported on Kindorf Hangers to meet Title 24, Part 3, CEC.
C. Exterior
1. Exterior conduit including the sweep below grade and the vertical riser shall be galvanized rigid steel conduit, except where rigid non-metallic conduit is required for utility service conduits by the serving utility company.
2. No rigid non-metallic conduit (RNC) shall be installed above grade.
D. Underground
1. Two or more power or telecommunications conduit runs installed in a common trench shall be separated horizontally by a minimum of four inches (4”).
2. Two or more power and telecommunications conduit runs installed in a common trench shall be separated horizontally by a minimum of twelve inches (12”).
3. All electrical conduit runs installed in a common trench with other utility company lines, plumbing pipes, or heating pipes shall be separated horizontally from such lines by a minimum of twelve inches (12”).
4. Conduits installed underground and not under buildings shall have a minimum of 24” of cover over the top of the conduit.
587
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 16 of 28
5. Utility service conduits shall be installed according to the serving utility’s requirements for material, depth of cover, and separation.
6. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be laid on excavated firm bed, sealed watertight and unless with 24 inch earth cover, shall have 3 inch minimum concrete encasement unless under concrete. Plastic conduit without encasement shall be random lay, “snaked”, not pulled tight. Plastic conduit laid in areas of reinforcing steel shall be supported independently at each threaded fitting. Plastic conduit joints shall be full solvent welded.
7. Rigid non-metallic conduit installed underground and not below a building slab shall have a galvanized rigid steel long radius elbow installed at the terminating end where the transition from horizontal to vertical occurs.
E. In Concrete Slabs
1. Conduit installed within concrete slabs shall be Schedule 80 PVC rigid non-metallic conduit or full weight galvanized rigid steel conduit.
2. Conduits in concrete slabs 3 inches thick or less shall not be of size larger than ¾ inch nominal trade size, and wired to top of reinforcing steel.
3. Conduit installed in concrete slabs shall be installed in the middle third of the slab thickness where practical, and have at least 1-inch concrete cover.
4. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.
5. Conduit installed in concrete slabs shall be installed side-by-side horizontally and shall have no less than 1” spacing between each conduit to allow for concrete consolidation to prevent voids in the concrete. Conduits that are installed in concrete slabs shall be arranged such that they do not cross over other conduits within the concrete slab.
Where crossing of conduits is unavoidable the crossing sets of conduits shall be installed below the slab. No more than 3 conduits shall be installed side-by-side in a concrete slab without special permission from the structural engineer.
6. Install conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel to or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where conduit is at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
7. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to membrane and shall repair it.
F. Below Grade Level Concrete Building Slab
1. All conduits below the building slab shall be Schedule 40 PVC rigid nonmetallic conduit or full weight galvanized rigid steel conduit, and shall have a 6” minimum cover below the floor slab measured from the bottom of the floor slab to the top of the conduit.
2. Rigid non-metallic conduits that are 1” trade size or smaller that are installed below the building slab shall transition from Schedule 40 PVC below the building slab to Schedule 80 PVC rigid nonmetallic conduit or galvanized rigid steel conduit, before passing into the concrete building slab and shall transition to
588
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 17 of 28 galvanized rigid steel conduit or IMC within the concrete building slab before exiting and rising above the building slab.
3. Rigid non-metallic conduits that are 1 ¼” trade size or larger that are installed below the building slab shall have a galvanized rigid steel long radius elbow installed at the terminating end where the transition from horizontal to vertical occurs and the vertical riser shall be galvanized rigid steel conduit rising above the building slab.
4. Rigid non-metallic conduit installed underground and not below a building slab.
5. Where conduits rise through the building slab they shall be installed at sufficient depth so that the curved portion of any bends, sweeps, or 90’s are not visible above the finished slab.
6. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to membrane and shall repair it.
G. Signal Systems
1. Two (2) spare 1” conduits shall be provided to each room and terminated in J-boxes above the ceiling for future low voltage needs.
2. Install telephone and signal system raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent.
3. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
H. In Beams and Footings
1. Conduit in concrete beam and footings shall be perpendicular to direction of beams unless otherwise indicated on structural drawings.
2. Conduit shown in concrete beam parallel to beams shall be installed at approximate mid-depth of beam.
I. Flexible Conduit
1. LFMC or FMC shall be used to connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement to junction boxes, with a maximum length of 24- inches.
2. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
3. Flexible conduits shall be independently suspended.
3.4 SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A. Surface Mounted Raceways shall be used to provide raceway systems for branch circuits and data network voice, video and other low-voltage wiring.
B. Surface Mounted Raceways shall be used only in dry interior locations, as allowed in Article 388 (Surface Nonmetallic Raceways) of the California Electrical Code. 589
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 18 of 28 C. Surface Mounted Raceways and wire distribution systems shall contain no more than six current carrying conductors in each section or compartment. Where additional conductors are required, additional raceway shall be installed to accommodate additional conductors.
D. Electrical and mechanical rooms are specifically excluded from the use of non-metallic Surface Mounted Raceways.
3.5 METAL CLAD TYPE MC CABLE APPLICATION
A. Branch circuits may be Type MC cable only where they are completely concealed within walls or above ceilings.
B. Type MC cable shall not be permitted for feeders.
C. Type MC cable shall not be permitted underground.
3.6 METAL CLAD TYPE MC-PCS CABLE APPLICATION
A. Lighting branch circuits may be Type MC-PCS cable only where they are completely concealed within walls or above ceilings.
B. Type MC-PCS cable shall not be permitted for branch circuits other than the controlled lighting branch circuits of individual spaces.
C. Type MC-PCS cable shall not be permitted for feeders.
D. Type MC-PCS cable shall not be permitted underground.
3.7 METAL CLAD CABLE – INSTALLATION
A. Install metal clad cable in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in strict accordance with CEC Article 330. Follow manufacturer’s explicit instructions when connecting the cable to fittings and boxes. Connectors shall be firmly secured to the cable, but not over tightened.
Connector shall be firmly attached to metal boxes.
B. Support metal clad cables every 6 feet and within 12 inches of boxes, per CEC Article 334, using separate spring metal clip or metal cable ties (not steel tie wire) for each cable. Metal clad cables shall not be bundled together.
C. Suspended ceiling drop wire may be used to directly support a maximum of two separate metal clad cables.
D. Provide separate drop wire above accessible ceiling, to support more than two metal clad cables.
E. Do not rest metal clad cables on ceiling tiles or allow contact with mechanical piping systems.
F. Bend metal clad cable per CEC Article 334.
590
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 19 of 28 G. Provide separate sleeves and/or fire barriers where metal clad cable penetrates firewalls, unless cable is UL listed for the application.
3.8 MODULAR WIRING SYSTEM APPLICATION
A. Modular wiring system shall be used for lighting system connection in accessible ceiling locations.
3.9 CONDUCTOR APPLICATION
A. Feeders and branch circuits shall be Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
B. Underground feeders and branch circuits shall be Type THWN or single-wire, Type UF insulated conductors in raceway.
C. Branch circuits for other than lighting circuits shall be Type THW or THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway. Lighting branch circuits shall be Type THW or THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway where exposed and may be metal-clad cable where concealed in ceilings and gypsum board partitions.
D. ”Minimum conductor size shall be #12 for power and lighting, #14 for 120V control circuits and #18 for 24V control circuits.
E. Remote control, signaling and power-limited circuits shall be Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway for Classes 1, 2, and 3, unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
A. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, no splices shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes.
B. Wiring at outlets shall be installed with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet.
C. Outlet and component connections shall be made to wiring systems and to ground. Electrical connectors and terminals shall be tightened according to manufacturer’s published torque- tightening values. Torque values specified in UL 486A shall be used where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated.
D. Wire in panels, cabinets, pull boxes, and wiring gutters shall be squared, labeled, and neatly grouped with cable ties and fanned out to the terminals.
E. All branch circuits, fixture wiring joints, splices, and taps for conductors #10 and smaller shall be made with 3M “Scotchlock” connectors, or approved equal. 591
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 20 of 28 F. All branch circuits, fixture wiring joints, splices, and taps for conductors #8 and larger shall be made with two-bolt type solderless connectors or T & B “color keyed” compression lugs.
G. Bolt-type solderless connectors shall be torqued with a torque wrench according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, and then retightened after 24-48 hours before taping.
Owners’ inspector shall be informed of this procedure during the waiting period and shall witness the act of retightening.
H. Connectors and lugs for terminating stranded conductors #8 and larger shall be machine crimp compression type.
I. All splices shall be taped with Scotch #88 plastic electrical tape with “Scotch Fill” where necessary for a smooth joint. Scotch #27 or #2520 shall be used for other than normal temperatures or conditions. All connections and splices shall be electrically perfect and in strict accordance with all code requirements.
J.No splices shall be made below grade in a manhole or pullholes without Engineer’s written approval, and then shall be encapsulated with 3M potting kits per 3M Specifications. For larger gauge wire where 3M potting kits are prohibited Contractor shall use submersible UL listed Polaris connectors by NSi.
3.11 WIREWAY AND AUXILIARY GUTTER APPLICATION
A. Wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be used above and below panelboards, lighting relay cabinets, and terminal cabinets to accommodate large concentrations of wires.
3.12 PULL BOXES AND WIREWAYS:
A. Boxes shall be installed square and plumb. An engraved nameplate shall be installed on each box indicating its function. Nameplate shall be installed on the exterior of each box in unfinished areas and on the interior of each box in finished areas.
B. Wireways shall be installed with strip-type connectors with self-retained mounting screws.
Hangers with two piece, hook together features shall be used to permit preassembly of wireway and hanger bottom plate before hanging on a preinstalled upper bracket.
C. Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown to ease the pulling of wire and to comply with CEC requirements.
3.13 WIRING DEVICES AND MATERIALS
A. Outlets shall be mounted at 18” minimum above finished floor unless otherwise noted.
B. The locations of outlets shown on drawings shall be located with respect to work of others and to be symmetrical with room layout.
592
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 21 of 28 C. Outlets in architectural patterned surfaces such as tile and finish panels shall be centered on intersections of four panels or in exact center of panels, unless otherwise shown on architectural plans or directed by Architect.
D. Outlet boxes for concealed work shall be one-piece steel knock out type with zinc coating. Boxes shall not be smaller than 4” square nominal size, unless otherwise indicated. Extension rings, plaster rings, and covers shall be provided as necessary for flush finish.
E. The Contractor shall inform himself of wall thickness throughout the building and shall provide outlet boxes of suitable depth that can be flush mounted and yet will be deep enough to contain the particular apparatus involved. Location of exposed pull or junction boxes will be subject to the Architect’s approval.
F. Outlet boxes on opposite sides of walls shall not be placed back-to-back, nor shall “through” boxes be employed (except where specifically permitted on the drawings by note).
G. Switches shall be mounted 48” to top of device box above finished floor unless otherwise noted.
H. Where more than one switch occurs at the same location, use multiple gang outlet boxes covered by a single plate; provide box partitions as required by the N.E.C.
I. Bar hangers shall be used to support outlet boxes in stud or furred partitions and ceilings.
Attachment screws, devices, etc., shall be of the proper type to secure boxes to metal studs complemented by expansion shields to concrete and masonry.
J.All outlet boxes and particularly those supporting fixtures shall be securely anchored in place in an approved manner. Support outlet boxes and fixtures in acoustic ceiling areas from building structures, not from acoustic ceilings. All lighting fixture outlets shall be coordinated with mechanical, architectural, or other equipment to eliminate conflicts and provide a workable, neat installation.
K. Approved knock out holes shall be provided. Outlet boxes from which light fixtures will be suspended shall be equipped with 3/8” fixture studs fastened through from back of box.
L. Surface boxes of the cast metal threaded hub type with suitable gasketed covers shall be used for exposed conduit runs less than 5’ above a finished floor or where waterproof boxes are required.
M. Floor boxes shall be adjustable, brass trimmed with carpet flanges where carpet is indicated on architectural drawings.
N. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.
O. Masonry boxes shall have conduit entrances to rear of box with depth as required to clear masonry.
P. Boxes shall be sized for number of conductors entering box.
Q. Wiring devices shall be securely fastened to the outlet box. Where the outlet box covers are back from the finished walls, the device shall be built out with washers so that it is 593
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 22 of 28 rigidly held in place to the box. Metal extenders shall be provided in flammable construction per CEC.
R. All device screw slots shall be left in a vertical orientation.
S. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
T. Connect ground terminal of isolated-ground receptacles to isolated-ground conductor routed to designated isolated equipment ground terminal of electrical system.
3.14 TERMINAL CABINETS AND CLOSETS
A. Terminal cabinets shall be installed level and identified with nameplate per schedule.
B. All conductors in terminal cabinets or closets shall be squared, labeled and secured neatly with wire ties.
C. All terminal cabinets shall be installed with the top of the trim at 6’-0” above the finished floor, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
D. Where space permits, terminal cabinets shall be surface mounted where they are not visible to the public.
E. A typewritten directory shall be mounted behind plastic in a metal holder welded to the inside of each terminal cabinet door showing a complete description of terminations in each cabinet.
3.15 PANELBOARDS
A. All panels shall have, in addition to conduit shown on the drawings, two ¾” and three 1” conduits stubbed to nearest accessible attic space.
B. All panels shall be installed with the top of the trim at 6’-0” above the finished floor, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
C. Where space permits, panels shall be surface mounted where they are not visible to the public.
D. A typewritten directory shall be mounted behind plastic in a metal holder welded to the inside of each panel door showing circuit numbers and complete description of all outlets on each circuit and an Arc-Flash Hazard Warning label shall be applied to each panelboard, switchboard and service entrance in accordance with CEC 110.16.
E. Labeling of all circuits at panel boards shall match the exact room names of each of the spaces.
Verify exact room names with Owner prior to labeling.
F. Electrical loads shall be disaggregated into separate panelboards per the 2019 California Energy Code Section 130.5(b).
594
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 23 of 28
3.16 DISCONNECT DEVICES
A. Thoroughly examine site conditions for acceptance of disconnects switch installation to verify conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
B. Coordinate locations of switches and equipment in the field to provide code required clearances in front of switches and to insure that switches are in sight of the controllers as described in NEC Article 430.
C. Install disconnect switches where indicated on the Drawings.
D. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
E. Include construction channel and mounting hardware as required to support disconnect switch.
F. Provide engraved, machine screw retained nameplate on each disconnect switch. Name plate shall identify equipment and panelboard + branch circuit breaker.
3.17 SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic channel and angle system components shall be used in damp locations and outdoors.
B. Steel materials shall be used in dry locations.
C. Support clamps for PVC raceways shall be click-type clamp system.
D. Strength of supports shall be adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four with a minimum of 200-lb design load.
3.18 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U- bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. 595
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 24 of 28 D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J.Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.
K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, according to the following criteria, unless otherwise noted:
1. Wood – wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry – toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, expansion bolts on solid masonry units.
3. New Concrete – concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete – expansion bolts.
5. Steel – welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel. Field welding shall comply with AWS D1.1. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items.
6. Light Steel – sheet-metal screws.
7. Fasteners shall be selected so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test load.
596
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 25 of 28
3.19 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Each conductor of every system shall be permanently tagged in each panelboard, pull box, J- box, etc., in compliance with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
B. Brady labels shall be used to identify terminals and destination of feeders, branch circuits, signal and control circuits, etc., at all terminations, junction boxes and pull boxes, and shall be coordinated with the nameplates in all boxes and equipment.
C. All terminals in the switchboards, panels, relays, switches, devices, starter terminals, etc., shall have Brady labels for identification to identify both ends of all wiring.
D. The Contractor shall furnish and install 1” x 3” x 3/32” thick laminated black Bakelite nameplates with a white core (unless specifically shown as red) engraved to produce white letters on black background for all items of electrical equipment, including 2-pole and 3-pole circuit breakers, panelboards, starters, relays, time switches and disconnect switches.
E. All devices shall have their branch circuit identified on the back side of device plate with a permanent type black marker, i.e. CT A-21. Identify panelboard and circuit number from which receptacles are served. Use machine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.
F. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
G. Panels having single-pole circuit breakers shall be provided with typed schedules mounted in welded metal holders behind plastic.
H. Clean surfaces that are to receive self-adhesive identification products before applying.
I. Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
J.Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:
1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking tape. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
3. Colors: As follows:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.
b. Security System: Blue and yellow.
c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
597
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 26 of 28 K. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase identification.
L. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall, use a single line marker.
M. All power conductors shall be identified in accordance with the following schedule:
1. 120/208V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System.
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
d. Neutral: White.
e. Ground: Green
2. 120/240V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System.
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B (Stinger): Orange.
c. Phase C: Blue.
d. Neutral: White
e. Ground: Green
3. Isolated ground conductor shall be green with a yellow stripe.
4. Clock wiring shall be 4 #14 TW or THWN, color coded as follows:
a. Hot circuit Black
b. Correction circuit Red
c. Neutral White
d. Ground Green
N. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
O. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background with minimum
3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.
3.20 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
598
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 27 of 28 A. Equipment shall be installed according to governing electric utility company’s written requirements. Grounding and empty conduits shall be provided as required by utility company.
3.21 FIRESTOPPING
A. Seal all penetrations for work of this section through fire rated floors, walls and ceilings to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration, either before, during, or after the fire. The fire and temperature ratings of the penetration assembly shall be at least that of the floor, wall, or ceiling into which it is installed so that the original fire rating of the floor or wall is maintained as required by Article 300.21 of the California Electrical Code (CEC).
B. Where applicable, provide OZ Type CFSF/I and CAFSF/I fire seal fittings for conduit and cable penetrations through concrete and masonry walls, floors, slabs and similar structures. Where applicable, provide 3M fire barrier sealing penetration system, and/or Thomas and Bett Flame Safe Fire Stop System, and/or Chase Foam fire stop system, including wall wrap, partitions, caps and other accessories as required. All manufacturers’ instructions and recommendations for installation of sealing fittings and barrier sealing systems.
C. The Contractor shall repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed new structures, surfaces and shall install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. The repair and refinishing of materials and other surfaces shall be by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
3.22 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. The Contractor shall clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. He shall follow paint manufacturer’s written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.
B. Damage to galvanized finishes shall be repaired with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
C. Damage to PVC or paint finishes shall be repaired with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
D. See Section 09900, “Painting”.
3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Owner’s electricity-metering installation for proper operation, accuracy, and usability of output data.
1. Connect a load of known kW rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by the metered feeder.
599
22-12479 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 28 of 28
2. Turn off circuits supplied by the metered feeder and secure them in the “off” condition.
3. Run the test load continuously for eight hours, minimum, or longer to obtain a measurable meter indication. Use a test load placement and setting that ensure continuous, safe operation.
4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity used based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply voltage at the test load connection. Record test results.
5. Repair or replace malfunctioning metering equipment or correct test setup; then retest.
Repeat for each meter in installation until proper operation of entire system is verified.
3.24 SYSTEM TESTING AND STARTUP
A. Refer to Specification Section 26 95 00 “Electrical Acceptance Tests” for minimum required systems testing and startup.
3.25 TITLE 24 - PART 6 DOCUMENTATION OF INSTALLATION AND ACCEPTANCE FOR ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit the following Certificates of Installation:
1. Electrical:
a. Certificate of Installation – Electrical Power Distribution (NRCI-ELE-01-E) END OF SECTION 260500
600
22-12479 GROUNDING 260526 - 1 of 7
SECTION 260526
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections shall form a part of this Section, with the same force and effect as though repeated here.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems.
Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for this Section shall be made according to the Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 Specification Sections and Specification Section 260100.
B. Product Data for grounding rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings.
C. Qualification data for firms specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
D. Field tests and observation reports certified by the testing organization and indicating and interpreting the test reports for compliance with performance requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7, or a full member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
1. Testing Agency Field Supervision: Use persons currently certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Comply with UL 467.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
601
22-12479 GROUNDING 260526 - 2 of 7
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Chance: A. B. Chance Co.
2. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
3. Galvan Industries, Inc.
4. Lyncole XIT Grounding.
5. Raco, Inc.
6. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
A. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of California Electrical Code (CEC) requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.
2.3 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Conform to CEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.
1. Material: Copper.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation.
C. Grounding-Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
D. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color, yellow striping insulation.
E. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
2.4 TELECOMMUNICATION MAIN GROUND BUS
A. Telecommunication main ground bus: 4”W x 1/4”H x 12”L UL listed and pre-assembled telecommunication main ground bus consisting of bare annealed-copper bar having pre- drilled hole patterns to accommodate two-hole lugs and with two 3/8” diameter mounting holes spaced 5.75” apart, 2-insulators, 2-stainless steel stand-off brackets, 4-stainless steel bolts, 4-lock washers and 4-flat washers + lug kit. Chatsworth model 40158-12, or equivalent.
602
22-12479 GROUNDING 260526 - 3 of 7
2.5 TELECOMMUNICATION GROUND BUS
A. Telecommunication ground bus: 2”W x 1/4”H x 12”L UL listed and pre-assembled telecommunication ground bus consisting of bare annealed-copper bar having pre-drilled hole patterns to accommodate two-hole lugs and with two 3/8” diameter mounting holes spaced 5.75” apart, 2-insulators, 2-stainless steel stand-off brackets, 4-stainless steel bolts, 4-lock washers and 4-flat washers + lug kit. Chatsworth model 40156-12, or equivalent.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS
A. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed-copper bars of rectangular cross section.
B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
C. Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as indicated.
2.7 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Grounding connections shall be exothermic welded, bolted clamp terminal, or pressure connector type.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections shall be provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.
C. Bolted Clamp connectors shall be heavy-duty type.
D. Pressure connectors shall be high-conductivity-plated units.
2.8 GROUNDING ELECTRODES AND TEST WELLS
A. Grounding Rods shall be sectional type; copper-clad steel.
1. Size: 3/4 inch by 120 inches
.
B. Plate Electrodes shall be copper, square or rectangular shape. Minimum 0.10 inch thick, size as indicated.
C. Test Wells shall consist of a Christy Concrete Products F8 Box, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The conduit system, supports, cabinets, switchboards, etc., and neutral conductors must be permanently and effectively grounded by means of approved ground clamps, in accordance with Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations. The neutral shall only be 603
22-12479 GROUNDING 260526 - 4 of 7
grounded at the main service location unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings or required by the California Electrical Code.
B. This Contractor shall exercise every precaution to obtain good contacts at all panel boxes, pull boxes, etc. Where it is not possible to obtain good contacts, the conduits shall be bonded around the boxes with a #6 AWG gauge, THWN wire with ground clamps.
C. Where there is more than one building supplied from a common service, provide a grounding electrode system at each building per CEC 250.50 and connect per CEC 250.32(B)(1).
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General
1. All equipment cases, motor frames, etc. shall be completely grounded to satisfy applicable code requirements.
2. The interior hot and cold water piping and the interior above ground gas piping shall be bonded to the building service equipment per CEC 250.104.
3. Do not use underground gas piping as a grounding electrode.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductor
1. Pull an Equipment Grounding Conductor, insulated green, in ALL conduits, both metallic and non-metallic, unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
2. Each disconnect switch shall have an Equipment Grounding Conductor (lay in wire type) which shall be used for grounding the disconnect enclosure. The ground wire shall continue and be connected to the enclosure of the equipment served.
3. Feeders and branch circuits shall be provided with an insulated grounding conductor run with the circuit conductors. This grounding conductor shall be in addition to the ground path provided by the continuously grounded metallic raceway system that encloses the phase and neutral conductors.
4. Comply with CEC Article 250 for types, sizes, and quantities of Equipment Grounding Conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by CEC are indicated.
5. Install separate Equipment Grounding Conductor in branch circuit runs from computer area power panels or power-distribution units.
C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits
1. Install an Equipment Grounding Conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and above, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Anti-frost Heater Circuits 604
22-12479 GROUNDING 260526 - 5 of 7
1. Install a separate Equipment Grounding Conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing assembly, and anti-frost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E. Signal and Communication Systems
1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide a No. 3/0 AWG minimum insulated copper grounding conductor in raceway from the building grounding-electrode system to a telecommunication main ground bus at the building telecommunication service entrance telephone backboard.
F. MDF Cabinets, IDF Cabinets, and Remote Telecommunication Cross Connect Rooms
1. Each MDF Cabinet and each IDF Cabinet shall have a telecommunication ground bus installed within the cabinet and the telecommunication ground bus shall be connected to the telecommunication main ground bus with a No. 4 AWG minimum insulated copper grounding conductor installed within a raceway.
G. Terminal Cabinets
1. Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to CEC requirements, except where Drawings or Specifications exceed CEC requirements.
B. Grounding Rods: Locate a minimum of 1-rod length from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode.
1. Drive until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Interconnect with grounding-electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging copper coating or exposing steel.
C. Grounding Conductors: Route along the shortest and straightest paths possible, except as otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
D. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use bare copper wire. Bury at least 24 inches below
grade.
E. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, sized as indicated, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding-clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Do not install a grounding jumper across dielectric fittings. Bond grounding-conductor conduit to conductor at each end.
F. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding-clamp connectors. 605
22-12479 GROUNDING 260526 - 6 of 7
G. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps.
H. Test Wells: One for each driven grounding electrode, except as otherwise indicated. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor. Fill with 1-inch- maximum-size crushed stone or gravel.
I. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to CEC Paragraph 250.52(A)(3), using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. Where base of concrete foundation is less than 20 feet in length, coil excess conductor within base of concrete foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel to at least 4 locations, and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to concrete.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C. Equipment Grounding-Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
D. Non-contact Metal Raceway Terminations: Where metallic raceways or metallic sheathed cables terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each metallic raceway or metallic sheathed cable with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits or sheathed cables at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and grounding rods. 606
22-12479 GROUNDING 260526 - 7 of 7
F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where these requirements are not available, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
H. Moisture Protection: Where insulated grounding conductors are connected to grounding rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Specification Section 269500 “Electrical Acceptance Tests” for minimum required testing of Grounding System.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, except as otherwise indicated. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Division 02 Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
END OF SECTION 260526
607
22-12479 SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 1 of 7
SECTION 262413
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install the main switchboard as herein specified.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The switchboard and overcurrent protection devices referenced herein shall be designed and manufactured according to the following appropriate specifications.
1. 2019 California Electrical Code (CEC).
2. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards, File E8681
3. NEMA PB 2.1 - Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
4. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
5. UL 891 - Dead-Front Switchboards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for this Section shall be made according to the Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 Specification Sections and Specification Section 260100.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit Shop Drawings for each switchboard indicating front and side enclosure elevations with overall dimensions, conduit entrance locations and requirements, nameplate legends, one-line diagrams, equipment schedule and switchboard instrument details.
C. Test Reports
1. Submit certified reports of Independent Tests and Observations indicating and interpreting test results specified in Part 3 of this Section.
2. Submit calibration record for all testing devices used.
3. Submit certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that Independent Testing Agency complies with requirements specified in Section 260100 / 269500, Article
1.2. D. Operation and Maintenance Data
1. Submit operation and maintenance data for switchboards to include in “Operations and Maintenance Instructions” manuals specified in Division 01 and 608
22-12479 SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 2 of 7
Specification Section 260100, Article 1.6, including detailed manufacturer’s written instructions on adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in conformance with manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Each switchboard section shall be delivered in individual shipping splits for ease of handling. They shall be individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids.
C. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period.
D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection and/or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect structure from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. Where applicable, provide adequate heating within enclosures to prevent condensation.
E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only by lifting means provided for this express purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
B. Determine suitable path for moving switchboard into place considering project conditions.
C. Verify clearance requirements. Locate switchboard to meet installation tolerances.
D. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit project conditions.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of purchase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. This design is based on the use of equipment (Speed-D switchboard with pull section) manufactured by Square D Company. Subject to compliance with project requirements, equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers may be considered:
1. Square D Company;
609
22-12479 SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 3 of 7
2. General Electric Company;
3. Eaton;
4. Siemens;
2.2 SWITCHBOARD - GENERAL
A. Switchboards shall be rated with a minimum short circuit current rating 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC maximum. Continuous bus ratings shall be as shown on drawings. Switchboards shall be legibly marked with the maximum available fault current obtained from the utility company; the marking shall include the date that the fault current calculation was performed.
B. Switchboards shall bear an Arc-Flash Hazard warning label in accordance with CEC Article 110.16.
C. The main switchboard and each switchboard containing a main circuit breaker utilized as a building main disconnect shall have a permanently installed user-accessible meter Square D Power Logic Model PM5560 with 10/100BaseTx UTP port, RS-485 Modbus serial master port, Ethernet to serial line gateway, embedded web server, two Ethernet ports with Modbus TCP protocol and two Ethernet ports with BACnet/IP protocol, that is separate and in addition to the utility company meter. The user-accessible meter shall provide all of the following functions:
1. Instantaneous (at the time) kW demand
2. Historical peak kW demand
3. Resettable kWh
4. kWh per rate period
5. Ethernet network connection
D. All unused spaces provided, unless otherwise specified, shall be fully equipped for future devices, including all appropriate connectors and mounting hardware.
E. Enclosure shall be NEMA 250, Type 3R Rainproof.
1. Sections shall be aligned front and rear.
2. Switchboard height shall be 90 inches including 1.5-inch floor sills and excluding lifting members and pull boxes.
3. The switchboard shall be of deadfront construction.
4. The switchboard frame shall be of formed steel rigidly bolted together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation.
5. Steel base channels shall be bolted to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floor mounting.
6. Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and an individually removable top plate for installation and termination of conduit.
7. Barriers shall be provided between adjacent switchboard sections. 610
22-12479 SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 4 of 7
8. The switchboard enclosure shall be painted on all exterior surfaces in manufacturer’s standard color, applied over a corrosion-resistant undercoating.
9. All front covers shall be screw removable with a single tool and all doors shall be hinged with removable hinge pins.
10. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings.
F. Utility Pull and/or Metering compartments shall be fabricated to meet utility company’s requirements. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard.
G. Bus Transition and Incoming Line Pull Sections shall be matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
H. Provide 1in H X 3in W engraved laminated nameplates for each device. Furnish black letters on a white background for all voltages.
I. Bus Composition shall be plated copper. Plating shall be applied continuously to all bus work. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 temperature rise requirements. The phase and neutral through-bus shall have an ampacity as shown in the plans. For 4-wire systems, the neutral shall be of equivalent ampacity as the phase bus bar. Tapered bus is not acceptable. Full provisions for the addition of future sections shall be provided. Bussing shall include all necessary hardware to accommodate splicing for future additions.
J. Bus Connections shall be bolted with Grade 5 bolts and conical spring washers.
K. Ground Bus shall be sized per NFPA 70 and UL 891 Tables 25.1 and 25.2 and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. Provisions for the addition of future sections shall be provided.
L. The switchboard shall be accessible from the front, left side and right side.
2.3 MAIN OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
A. Main Circuit Breaker shall be a fixed mounted, full function, electronic trip molded case circuit breaker.
1. Circuit breaker trip system shall be microprocessor-based true rms sensing design with sensing accuracy through the thirteenth (13 th) harmonic. Sensor ampere ratings shall be as directed by Engineer.
2. The integral trip system shall be independent of any external power source and shall contain no less than industrial grade electronic components.
3. The ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be determined by the combination of an interchangeable rating plug, the sensor size and the long-time pickup adjustment on the circuit breaker. The sensor size, rating plug and switch adjustments shall be clearly marked on the face of the circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be UL Listed to carry 100% of their ampere rating continuously.
4. The following time/current response adjustments shall be provided. Each adjustment shall have discrete settings and shall be independent of all other adjustments.
611
22-12479 SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 5 of 7
a. Long Time Pickup
b. Long Time Delay
c. Short Time Pickup
d. Short Time Delay (I 2t IN and I2t OUT)
e. Instantaneous Pickup
f. Ground Fault Pickup
g. Ground Fault Delay (I 2t IN and I2t OUT)